ETC TMS320C6412-600

TMS320C6412
Fixed-Point Digital Signal
Processor
Data Manual
Literature Number: SPRS219A
April 2003 – Revised May 2003
PRODUCT PREVIEW information concerns products in the formative or
design phase of development. Characteristic data and other
specifications are design goals. Texas Instruments reserves the right to
change or discontinue these products without notice.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications,
enhancements, improvements, and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue
any product or service without notice. Customers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing
orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are sold subject to TI’s terms
and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in
accordance with TI’s standard warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI
deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by government requirements, testing of all
parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for
their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products
and applications, customers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right,
copyright, mask work right, or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process
in which TI products or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third–party products or services
does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof.
Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property
of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without
alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction
of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for
such altered documentation.
Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that
product or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and
is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Mailing Address:
Texas Instruments
Post Office Box 655303
Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright  2003, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Revision History
REVISION HISTORY
This data sheet revision history highlights the technical changes made to the SPRS219* device-specific data
sheet to make it an SPRS219A revision.
Scope: Applicable updates to the C64x device family, specifically relating to the TMS320C6412 device, have
been incorporated. “TBD” areas, where possible, have been resolved since the last document update.
PAGE(s)
NO.
3
Revision History:
Created a Revision History for the SPRS219A document
17
Description section:
Changed the “The ethernet media access controller (EMAC) provides ...” paragraph “TBD” to “For more details on the
EMAC, see the ... (literature number SPRU628)”
Added more module functionality clarification to the “The management data input/output (MDIO) module provides TBD ...”
paragraph
Added the “For more details on the MDIO port, see the ... (literature number SPRU628)” reference to the “The management
data input/output (MDIO) module provides TBD ...” paragraph
Deleted “boot from a serial EEPROM” from the “The I2C0 port on the TMS320C6412 allows the DSP ...” paragraph
19
Table 1–1, Characteristics of the C6412 Processor
Added “[DeviceID Register value 0x9065]” to the Hardware Features for the PCI
20
Device Compatibility section:
Deleted “The common peripheral set, code-compatibility, and ...” sentence from the “C64x DSP generation of devices has a
diverse and powerful ...” paragraph
35
Table 1–12, EWRAP Registers:
Changed the Reserved row from 01C8 0300C – 01C8 37FF” to “01C8 300C – 01C8 37FF”
38
Table 1–21, PCI Registers:
Deleted the “TBD PID Peripheral device identification register Register value TBD” row
[The Register value information now resides in the Characteristics of the C6412 Processor table (Table 1–1) of this
document]
48
Table 2–1, PCI_EN, HD5, and MAC_EN Peripheral Selection (HPI, GP0[15:9], PCI, EMAC, and MDIO)
Updated the pin location of the PCI_EN Pin from “[AA4]” to “[E2]”
Updated the pin location of the MAC_EN Pin from “[D6]” to “[C5]”
Changed the GP0 pins under PERIPHERALS SELECTED from “GP0 – GP0[15:9]” to “GP0[15:9]”
49
Table 2–2, HPI vs. EMAC Peripheral Pin Selection
Updated the pin location of the MAC_EN Pin from “[D6]” to “[C5]”
49
Table 2–3, C6412 Device Configuration Pins (TOUT1/LENDIAN, AEA[22:19], GP0[3]/PCIEEAI, and HD5):
Changed the EMIFA input clock select bits FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION for the “11” setting from “AECLKIN” to “Reserved”
52
Peripheral Configuration Lock section:
Changed the sentence “Switching between peripherals that share multiplexed pins ...” to “Software muxed pins
should not be programmed to switch functionalities during run-time.”
54–55
PRODUCT PREVIEW
ADDS/CHANGES/DELETES
Table 2–7, Device Status (DEVSTAT) Register Selection Bit Descriptions
Changed the EMAC enable bit DESCRIPTION from “1 = IEMAC is enabled.” to “1 = EMAC is enabled.”
Changed the HPI bus width control bit DESCRIPTION from “1 = IHPI operates in 32-bit mode.” to “1 = HPI operates in 32-bit
mode.”
Changed the EMIFA input clock select bits DESCRIPTION for the “11” setting from “AECLKIN” to “Reserved”
April 2003 – Revised May 2003
SPRS219A
3
Revision History
PAGE(s)
NO.
56
PRODUCT PREVIEW
58–59
Multiplexed Pins section:
Changed the sentence “Those muxed pins that are configured by software can be programmed to switch functionalities at
any time.” to “Those muxed pins that are configured by software should not be programmed to switch functionalities during
run-time.
Configuration Examples section:
Deleted “TBD” from the Configuration Examples title
Changed lead-in paragraph from “TBD” to new figure reference
Added one new figure depicting C6412 Configuration Example (Figure 2–6)
62
Terminal Functions table, RESETS, INTERRUPTS, AND GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUTS section:
Added “This pin must remain low during device reset.” to the GP0[0] signal description
66
Terminal Functions table, EMIFA (64-BIT) – ASYNCHRONOUS/SYNCHRONOUS MEMORY CONTROL section:
Changed the AECLKIN pin DESCRIPTION “The EMIFA input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) is selected at
reset via the pullup/pulldown resistors on the ... pins.” from “... BEA[17:16] pins.” to “... AEA[20:19] pins.”
67
Terminal Functions table, EMIFA (64-BIT) – ADDRESS section, – Boot mode (AEA[22:21]): DESCRIPTION:
Changed the “00” setting from “No boot” to “No boot (default mode)”
Changed the “01” setting from “HPI boot” to “HPI/PCI boot (based on PCI_EN pin)”
Changed the “10” setting from “EMIFA 8-bit ROM boot with default timings (default mode)” to “Reserved”
Changed the “11” setting from “Reserved” to “EMIFA boot”
69
Terminal Functions table, TIMER 1 section:
Changed the IPD/IPU for TOUT1/LENDIAN from “IPD” to “IPU”
85
Figure 2–7, TMS320DM64x DSP Device Nomenclature (Including the TMS320C6412 Device):
Changed device nomenclature from a “TMS” example to a “TMX” example due to the current C6412 device stage
86
Documentation Support section:
Deleted the paragraph reference “TMS320DM642 Technical Overview (literature number SPRU615) describes the
TMS320DM642 architecture including details of its peripherals. This document also shows ...”
96
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Compatibility Statement section:
Updated/changed/added paragraphs to clarify the TRST and RESET pin functions on the C6412 DSP device
97
Bootmode section:
Added new Bootmode section
107–108
131
4
ADDS/CHANGES/DELETES
Asynchronous Memory Timing section:
Updated/changed Figure 5–1, Asynchronous Memory Read Timing for EMIFA
Updated/changed Figure 5–2, Asynchronous Memory Write Timing for EMIFA
Table 14–1, Timing Requirements for PCLK:
Split the “–500, –600” column into two separate columns “–500 [33 MHz]” and “–600 [66 MHz]”
Changed/Updated the –500 [33 MHz] and –600 [66 MHz] parametric values
SPRS219A
April 2003 – Revised May 2003
Contents
Contents
Section
Page
1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
GDK BGA Package (Bottom View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
GNZ BGA Package (Bottom View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
Device Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5
Device Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6
Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7
CPU (DSP Core) Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8
Memory Map Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9
Peripheral Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10
EDMA Channel Synchronization Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11
Interrupt Sources and Interrupt Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12
Signal Groups Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
16
16
17
19
20
20
21
24
26
40
42
43
2
Device
2.1
2.2
2.3
48
48
49
50
52
54
55
56
56
58
60
83
84
86
87
90
91
92
93
94
94
94
95
96
96
97
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peripheral Selection at Device Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Configuration at Device Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peripheral Selection After Device Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1
Peripheral Configuration Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2
Device Status Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3
JTAG ID Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiplexed Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Debugging Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Development Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Documentation Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-Supply Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.16.1
Power-Supply Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-Supply Decoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-Down Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Compatibility Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMIF Device Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bootmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
April 2003 – Revised May 2003
SPRS219A
5
Contents
Section
Page
3
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case Temperature Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.2
Recommended Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.3
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating
Case Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.4
Parameter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.4.1
Signal Transition Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.4.2
Signal Transition Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.5
Timing Parameters and Board Routing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4
Input and Output Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5
Asynchronous Memory Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6
Programmable Synchronous Interface Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7
Synchronous DRAM Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
8
HOLD/HOLDA Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
9
BUSREQ Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10 Reset Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
11 External Interrupt Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
12 Inter-Integrated Circuits (I2C) Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
13 Host-Port Interface (HPI) Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
14 Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
15 Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
16 Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6
SPRS219A
April 2003 – Revised May 2003
Contents
Section
Page
17 Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
18 Timer Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
19 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Port Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
20 JTAG Test-Port Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
21 Mechanical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
21.1
Ball Grid Array Mechanical Data Drawing (GDK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
21.2
Ball Grid Array Mechanical Data Drawing (GNZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
April 2003 – Revised May 2003
SPRS219A
7
Figures
List of Figures
Figure
Page
1–1
GDK BGA Package (Bottom View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1–2
1–3
GNZ BGA Package (Bottom View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1–4
1–5
TMS320C64x CPU (DSP Core) Data Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
CPU and Peripheral Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1–6
Peripheral Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2–1
Peripheral Configuration Register (PERCFG) [Address Location: 0x01B3F000 – 0x01B3F003] . . . . . . 50
2–2
2–3
Peripheral Enable/Disable Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
PCFGLOCK Register Diagram [Address Location: 0x01B3 F018] – Read/Write Accesses . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2–4
2–5
Device Status Register (DEVSTAT) Description – 0x01B3 F004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
JTAG ID Register Description – TMS320C6412 Register Value – 0x0007 902F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2–6
Configuration Example (2 McBSPs + EMAC + MDIO + I2C0 + EMIF + HPI + 3 Timers + VIC) . . . . . . . 59
2–7
2–8
TMS320C64x DSP Device Nomenclature (Including the TMS320C6412 Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
External PLL Circuitry for Either PLL Multiply Modes or x1 (Bypass) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2–9
2–10
I2C0 Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Schottky Diode Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3–1
Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3–2
Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3–3
3–4
Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Board-Level Input/Output Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4–1
CLKIN Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4–2
4–3
CLKOUT4 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
CLKOUT6 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4–4
ECLKIN Timing for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4–5
4–6
AECLKOUT1 Timing for EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
AECLKOUT2 Timing for the EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5–1
Asynchronous Memory Read Timing for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5–2
Asynchronous Memory Write Timing for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6–1
Programmable Synchronous Interface Read Timing for EMIFA (With Read Latency = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6–2
6–3
Programmable Synchronous Interface Write Timing for EMIFA (With Write Latency = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Programmable Synchronous Interface Write Timing for EMIFA (With Write Latency = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . 112
8
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Figures
Figure
Page
7–1
7–2
7–3
7–4
7–5
7–6
7–7
7–8
SDRAM
SDRAM
SDRAM
SDRAM
SDRAM
SDRAM
SDRAM
SDRAM
Read Command (CAS Latency 3) for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Command for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACTV Command for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCAB Command for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEAC Command for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REFR Command for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MRS Command for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-Refresh Timing for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8–1
HOLD/HOLDA Timing for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
9–1
BUSREQ Timing for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10–1
Reset Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
11–1
External/NMI Interrupt Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
12–1
12–2
I2C Receive Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
I2C Transmit Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
13–1
13–2
13–3
13–4
13–5
13–6
13–7
13–8
HPI16 Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPI16 Read Timing (HAS Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPI16 Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPI16 Write Timing (HAS Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPI32 Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPI32 Read Timing (HAS Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPI32 Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPI32 Write Timing (HAS Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
127
128
128
129
129
130
130
14–1
14–2
14–3
14–4
14–5
PCLK Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI Reset (PRST) Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI Input Timing (33-/66-MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI Output Timing (33-/66-MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI Serial EEPROM Interface Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
131
131
132
132
133
15–1
15–2
15–3
McBSP Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
FSR Timing When GSYNC = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
114
115
116
116
117
117
118
118
9
Figures
Figure
Page
15–4
15–5
15–6
McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
16–1
16–2
16–3
16–4
MRCLK Timing (EMAC – Receive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTCLK Timing (EMAC – Transmit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMAC Receive Interface Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMAC Transmit Interface Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17–1
17–2
MDIO Input Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
MDIO Output Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
18–1
Timer Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
19–1
GPIO Port Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
20–1
JTAG Test-Port Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
10
SPRS219A
141
141
142
142
April 2003 – May 2003
Tables
List of Tables
Table
Page
1–1
1–2
1–3
1–4
1–5
1–6
1–7
1–8
1–9
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–13
1–14
1–15
1–16
1–17
1–18
1–19
1–20
1–21
1–22
1–23
1–24
1–25
Characteristics of the C6412 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMS320C6412 Memory Map Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMIFA Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L2 Cache Registers (C64x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick DMA (QDMA) and Pseudo Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDMA Registers (C64x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDMA Parameter RAM (C64x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupt Selector Registers (C64x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peripheral Power-Down Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet MAC (EMAC) Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMAC Wrapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EWRAP Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Configuration Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
McBSP 0 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
McBSP 1 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer 0 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer 1 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer 2 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPI Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GP0 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI Peripheral Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDIO Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I2C0 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMS320C6412 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C6412 DSP Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
24
26
26
28
29
29
30
30
31
35
35
35
36
36
37
37
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
42
2–1
2–2
2–3
2–4
2–5
2–6
2–7
2–8
2–9
2–10
2–11
PCI_EN, HD5, and MAC_EN Peripheral Selection (HPI, GP0[15:9], PCI, EMAC, and MDIO) . . . . . . . .
HPI vs. EMAC Peripheral Pin Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C6412 Device Configuration Pins (TOUT1/LENDIAN, AEA[22:19], GP0[3]/PCIEEAI, and HD5) . . . . .
Peripheral Configuration (PERCFG) Register Selection Bit Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCFGLOCK Register Selection Bit Descriptions – Read Accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCFGLOCK Register Selection Bit Descriptions – Write Accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Status (DEVSTAT) Register Selection Bit Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JTAG ID Register Selection Bit Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C6412 Device Multiplexed Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMS320C6412 PLL Multiply Factor Options, Clock Frequency Ranges, and Typical Lock Time . . . . . .
48
49
49
51
53
53
54
55
57
61
89
3–1
Board-Level Timing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4–1
4–2
4–3
4–4
Timing Requirements for CLKIN for –500 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Requirements for CLKIN for –600 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
102
102
103
103
11
Tables
Table
4–5
4–6
4–7
Page
Timing Requirements for AECLKIN for EMIFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for AECLKOUT1 for
the EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for AECLKOUT2 for
the EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5–1
5–2
Timing Requirements for Asynchronous Memory Cycles for EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Asynchronous
Memory Cycles for EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6–1
6–2
Timing Requirements for Programmable Synchronous Interface Cycles for EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . 109
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Programmable
Synchronous Interface Cycles for EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7–1
7–2
Timing Requirements for Synchronous DRAM Cycles for EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Synchronous DRAM
Cycles for EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
8–1
8–2
Timing Requirements for the HOLD/HOLDA Cycles for EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for the HOLD/HOLDA
Cycles for EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
9–1
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for the BUSREQ
Cycles for EMIFA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10–1
10–2
Timing Requirements for Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
11–1
Timing Requirements for External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
12–1
12–2
Timing Requirements for I2C Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Switching Characteristics for I2C Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
13–1
13–2
Timing Requirements for Host-Port Interface Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Host-Port
Interface Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
14–1
14–2
14–3
14–4
14–5
14–6
Timing Requirements for PCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Requirements for PCI Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Requirements for PCI Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for PCI Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Requirements for Serial EEPROM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Serial EEPROM Interface . .
12
SPRS219A
131
131
132
132
133
133
April 2003 – May 2003
Tables
Table
Page
15–1
15–2
15–3
15–4
15–5
134
135
136
137
Timing Requirements for McBSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Requirements for FSR When GSYNC = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP as SPI Master or
Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15–6 Timing Requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15–7 Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP as SPI Master or
Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15–8 Timing Requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
15–9 Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP as SPI Master or
Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 15–5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15–10 Timing Requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15–11 Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP as SPI Master or
Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16–1
16–2
16–3
16–4
Timing Requirements for MRCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Requirements for MTCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Requirements for EMAC MII Receive 10/100 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMAC MII Transmit
10/100 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
138
138
139
139
140
140
141
141
142
142
17–1
17–2
Timing Requirements for MDIO Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MDIO Output . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
18–1
18–2
Timing Requirements for Timer Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Timer Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
19–1
19–2
Timing Requirements for GPIO Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
20–1
20–2
Timing Requirements for JTAG Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for JTAG Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . 146
21–1
21–2
Thermal Resistance Characteristics (S-PBGA Package) [GDK] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Thermal Resistance Characteristics (S-PBGA Package) [GNZ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
13
Tables
14
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Features
Features
D High-Performance Digital Media Processor
D
D
D
(TMS320C6412)
– 2-, 1.67-ns Instruction Cycle Time
– 500-, 600-MHz Clock Rate
– Eight 32-Bit Instructions/Cycle
– 4000, 4800 MIPS
– Fully Software-Compatible With C64x
VelociTI.2 Extensions to VelociTI
Advanced Very-Long-Instruction-Word
(VLIW) TMS320C64x DSP Core
– Eight Highly Independent Functional
Units With VelociTI.2 Extensions:
– Six ALUs (32-/40-Bit), Each Supports
Single 32-Bit, Dual 16-Bit, or Quad
8-Bit Arithmetic per Clock Cycle
– Two Multipliers Support
Four 16 x 16-Bit Multiplies
(32-Bit Results) per Clock Cycle or
Eight 8 x 8-Bit Multiplies
(16-Bit Results) per Clock Cycle
– Load-Store Architecture With
Non-Aligned Support
– 64 32-Bit General-Purpose Registers
– Instruction Packing Reduces Code Size
– All Instructions Conditional
Instruction Set Features
– Byte-Addressable (8-/16-/32-/64-Bit Data)
– 8-Bit Overflow Protection
– Bit-Field Extract, Set, Clear
– Normalization, Saturation, Bit-Counting
– VelociTI.2 Increased Orthogonality
L1/L2 Memory Architecture
– 128K-Bit (16K-Byte) L1P Program Cache
(Direct Mapped)
– 128K-Bit (16K-Byte) L1D Data Cache
(2-Way Set-Associative)
– 2M-Bit (256K-Byte) L2 Unified Mapped
RAM/Cache
(Flexible RAM/Cache Allocation)
D Endianess: Little Endian, Big Endian
D 64-Bit External Memory Interface (EMIF)
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
– Glueless Interface to Asynchronous
Memories (SRAM and EPROM) and
Synchronous Memories (SDRAM,
SBSRAM, ZBT SRAM, and FIFO)
– 1024M-Byte Total Addressable External
Memory Space
Enhanced Direct-Memory-Access (EDMA)
Controller (64 Independent Channels)
10/100 Mb/s Ethernet MAC (EMAC)
– IEEE 802.3 Compliant
– Media Independent Interface (MII)
– 8 Independent Transmit (TX) and
8 Independent Receive (RX) Channels
Management Data Input/Output (MDIO)
Host-Port Interface (HPI) [32-/16-Bit]
32-Bit/66-MHz, 3.3-V Peripheral Component
Interconnect (PCI) Master/Slave Interface
Conforms to PCI Specification 2.2
Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Bus
Two Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports
Three 32-Bit General-Purpose Timers
Sixteen General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) Pins
Flexible PLL Clock Generator
IEEE-1149.1 (JTAG†)
Boundary-Scan-Compatible
548-Pin Ball Grid Array (BGA) Package
(GDK Suffix), 0.8-mm Ball Pitch
548-Pin Ball Grid Array (BGA) Package
(GNZ Suffix), 1.0-mm Ball Pitch
0.13-µm/6-Level Cu Metal Process (CMOS)
3.3-V I/Os, 1.2-V Internal (-500)
3.3-V I/Os, 1.4-V Internal (-600)
C64x, VelociTI.2, VelociTI, and TMS320C64x are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
† IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
15
PRODUCT PREVIEW
1
Features
1.1
GDK BGA Package (Bottom View)
GDK 548-PIN BALL GRID ARRAY (BGA) PACKAGE
( BOTTOM VIEW )
AF
AE
AD
AC
AB
AA
Y
W
V
U
T
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
PRODUCT PREVIEW
D
C
B
A
1
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
Figure 1–1. GDK BGA Package (Bottom View)
1.2
GNZ BGA Package (Bottom View)
GNZ 548-PIN BALL GRID ARRAY (BGA) PACKAGE
( BOTTOM VIEW )
AF
AE
AD
AC
AB
AA
Y
W
V
U
T
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
Figure 1–2. GNZ BGA Package (Bottom View)
16
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Description
1.3
Description
With performance of up to 4800 million instructions per second (MIPS) at a clock rate of
600 MHz, the C6412 device offers cost-effective solutions to high-performance DSP
programming challenges. The C6412 DSP possesses the operational flexibility of high-speed
controllers and the numerical capability of array processors. The C64x DSP core processor
has 64 general-purpose registers of 32-bit word length and eight highly independent functional
units—two multipliers for a 32-bit result and six arithmetic logic units (ALUs)— with VelociTI.2
extensions. The VelociTI.2 extensions in the eight functional units include new instructions to
accelerate the performance in applications and extend the parallelism of the VelociTI
architecture. The C6412 can produce four 32-bit multiply-accumulates (MACs) per cycle for a
total of 2400 million MACs per second (MMACS), or eight 8-bit MACs per cycle for a total of
4800 MMACS. The C6412 DSP also has application-specific hardware logic, on-chip memory,
and additional on-chip peripherals similar to the other C6000 DSP platform devices.
The C6412 uses a two-level cache-based architecture and has a powerful and diverse set of
peripherals. The Level 1 program cache (L1P) is a 128-Kbit direct mapped cache and the
Level 1 data cache (L1D) is a– 128-Kbit 2-way set-associative cache. The Level 2
memory/cache (L2) consists of an 2-Mbit memory space that is shared between program and
data space. L2 memory can be configured as mapped memory, cache, or combinations of the
two. The peripheral set includes: a 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet MAC (EMAC); a management data
input/output (MDIO) module; an inter-integrated circuit (I2C) Bus module; two multichannel
buffered serial ports (McBSPs); three 32-bit general-purpose timers; a user-configurable 16-bit
or 32-bit host-port interface (HPI16/HPI32); a peripheral component interconnect (PCI); a 16-pin
general-purpose input/output port (GP0) with programmable interrupt/event generation modes;
and a 64-bit glueless external memory interface (EMIFA), which is capable of interfacing to
synchronous and asynchronous memories and peripherals.
The ethernet media access controller (EMAC) provides an efficient interface between the C6412
DSP core processor and the network. The C6412 EMAC support both 10Base-T and
100Base-TX, or 10 Mbits/second (Mbps) and 100 Mbps in either half- or full-duplex, with
hardware flow control and quality of service (QOS) support. The C6412 EMAC makes use of a
custom interface to the DSP core that allows efficient data transmission and reception. For more
details on the EMAC, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) /
Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) Module Reference Guide (literature number SPRU628).
The management data input/output (MDIO) module continuously polls all 32 MDIO addresses in
order to enumerate all PHY devices in the system. Once a PHY candidate has been selected by
the DSP, the MDIO module transparently monitors its link state by reading the PHY status
register. Link change events are stored in the MDIO module and can optionally interrupt the
DSP, allowing the DSP to poll the link status of the device without continuously performing costly
MDIO accesses. For more details on the MDIO port, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Ethernet
Media Access Controller (EMAC) / Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) Module Reference
Guide (literature number SPRU628).
TMS320C6000, and C6000 are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
17
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The TMS320C64x DSPs (including the TMS320C6412 device) are the highest-performance
fixed-point DSP generation in the TMS320C6000 DSP platform. The TMS320C6412 (C6412)
device is based on the second-generation high-performance, advanced VelociTI
very-long-instruction-word (VLIW) architecture (VelociTI.2) developed by Texas Instruments
(TI), making these DSPs an excellent choice for digital media applications. The C64x is a
code-compatible member of the C6000 DSP platform.
Description
The I2C0 port on the TMS320C6412 allows the DSP to easily control peripheral devices and
communicate with a host processor. In addition, the standard multichannel buffered serial port
(McBSP) may be used to communicate with serial peripheral interface (SPI) mode peripheral
devices.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The C6412 has a complete set of development tools which includes: a new C compiler, an
assembly optimizer to simplify programming and scheduling, and a Windows debugger
interface for visibility into source code execution.
18
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Device Characteristics
1.4
Device Characteristics
Table 1–1 provides an overview of the C6412 DSP. The table shows significant features of the
C6412 device, including the capacity of on-chip RAM, the peripherals, the CPU frequency, and
the package type with pin count.
Table 1–1. Characteristics of the C6412 Processor
EMIFA (64-bit bus width)
(clock source = AECLKIN)
1
EDMA (64 independent channels)
1
I2C0 (uses Peripheral Clock)
Peripherals
Peri
herals
Not all peripherals pins are
available at the same time
(For more detail, see the
Device Configuration
section).
)
1
HPI (32- or 16-bit user selectable)
1 (HPI16 or HPI32)
PCI (32-bit), 66-MHz/33-MHz
[DeviceID Register value 0x9065]
1
McBSPs
(internal clock source = CPU/4 clock frequency)
2
10/100 Ethernet MAC (EMAC)
1
Management Data Input/Output (MDIO)
1
32-Bit Timers
(internal clock source = CPU/8 clock frequency)
3
General-Purpose Input/Output Port (GP0)
16
Size (Bytes)
On-Chip Memory
C6412
PRODUCT PREVIEW
HARDWARE FEATURES
288K
16K-Byte (16KB) L1 Program (L1P) Cache
Organization
16KB L1 Data (L1D) Cache
256KB Unified Mapped RAM/Cache (L2)
CPU ID + CPU Rev ID
Control Status Register (CSR.[31:16])
JTAG BSDL_ID
JTAGID register (address location: 0x01B3F008)
Frequency
MHz
Cycle Time
Voltage
ns
Core (V)
I/O (V)
PLL Options
BGA Package
0x0C01
0x0007902F
500, 600
2 ns (C6412-500)
[500 MHz CPU, 100 MHz EMIF†, 33 MHz PCI port]
1.67 ns (C6412-600)
[600 MHz CPU, 133 MHz EMIF†, 66 MHz PCI port]
1.2 V (-500)
1.4 V (-600)
3.3 V
CLKIN frequency multiplier
Bypass (x1), x6, x12
23 x 23 mm
548-Pin BGA (GDK)
27 x 27 mm
548-Pin BGA (GNZ)
Process Technology
µm
Product Status‡
Product Preview (PP), Advance Information (AI),
or Production Data (PD)
Device Part Numbers
(For more details on the C6000 DSP part
numbering, see Figure 2–7)
0.13 µm
PP
TMX320C6412GDK, TMX320C6412GNZ
† On this C64x device, the rated EMIF speed affects only the SDRAM interface on the EMIF. For more detailed information, see the EMIF device
speed portion of this data sheet.
‡ PRODUCT PREVIEW information concerns products in the formative or design phase of development. Characteristic data and other
specifications are design goals. Texas Instruments reserves the right to change or discontinue these products without notice.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
19
Device Compatibility
1.5
Device Compatibility
The C6412 device is a code-compatible member of the C6000 DSP platform.
The C64x DSP generation of devices has a diverse and powerful set of peripherals.
For more detailed information on the device compatibility and similarities/differences among the
DM642, C6412, and other C64x devices, see the TMS320DM642 Technical Overview
(literature number SPRU615).
1.6
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 1–3 shows the functional block diagram of the C6412 device.
C6412
SDRAM
SBSRAM
64
ZBT SRAM
Timer 2
FIFO
PRODUCT PREVIEW
L1P Cache Direct-Mapped
16K Bytes Total
EMIF A
Timer 1
SRAM
C64x DSP Core
Timer 0
Instruction Fetch
ROM/FLASH
Control
Registers
Instruction Dispatch
Advanced Instruction Packet
I/O Devices
McBSP0†
Data Path A
McBSP1†
PCI-66
OR
Control
Logic
Instruction Decode
Enhanced
DMA
Controller
(EDMA)
L2
Cache
Memory
256KBytes
A Register File
A31–A16
A15–A0
.L1
.S1
.M1 .D1
Data Path B
Test
B Register File
B31–B16
B15–B0
.D2 .M2 .S2
Advanced
In-Circuit
Emulation
Interrupt
Control
.L2
HPI32
OR
HPI16
AND
L1D Cache 2-Way Set-Associative
16K Bytes Total
EMAC
MDIO
PLL
(x1, x6, x12)
16
GP0
16
Power-Down
Logic
I2C0
Boot Configuration
† McBSPs: Framing Chips – H.100, MVIP, SCSA, T1, E1; AC97 Devices; SPI Devices; Codecs
Figure 1–3. Functional Block Diagram
20
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
CPU (DSP Core) Description
1.7
CPU (DSP Core) Description
•
Register file enhancements
•
Data path extensions
•
Quad 8-bit and dual 16-bit extensions with data flow enhancements
•
Additional functional unit hardware
•
Increased orthogonality of the instruction set
•
Additional instructions that reduce code size and increase register flexibility
The CPU features two sets of functional units. Each set contains four units and a register file.
One set contains functional units .L1, .S1, .M1, and .D1; the other set contains units .D2, .M2,
.S2, and .L2. The two register files each contain 32 32-bit registers for a total of 64
general-purpose registers. In addition to supporting the packed 16-bit and 32-/40-bit fixed-point
data types found in the C62x VelociTI VLIW architecture, the C64x register files also
support packed 8-bit data and 64-bit fixed-point data types. The two sets of functional units,
along with two register files, compose sides A and B of the CPU [see the functional block and
CPU (DSP core) diagram, and Figure 1–4]. The four functional units on each side of the CPU
can freely share the 32 registers belonging to that side. Additionally, each side features a “data
cross path”—a single data bus connected to all the registers on the other side, by which the two
sets of functional units can access data from the register files on the opposite side. The C64x
CPU pipelines data-cross-path accesses over multiple clock cycles. This allows the same
register to be used as a data-cross-path operand by multiple functional units in the same
execute packet. All functional units in the C64x CPU can access operands via the data cross
path. Register access by functional units on the same side of the CPU as the register file can
service all the units in a single clock cycle. On the C64x CPU, a delay clock is introduced
whenever an instruction attempts to read a register via a data cross path if that register was
updated in the previous clock cycle.
In addition to the C62x DSP fixed-point instructions, the C64x DSP includes a
comprehensive collection of quad 8-bit and dual 16-bit instruction set extensions. These
VelociTI.2 extensions allow the C64x CPU to operate directly on packed data to streamline
data flow and increase instruction set efficiency. This is a key factor for video and imaging
applications.
TMS320C62x is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
21
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The CPU fetches VelociTI advanced very-long instruction words (VLIWs) (256 bits wide) to
supply up to eight 32-bit instructions to the eight functional units during every clock cycle. The
VelociTI VLIW architecture features controls by which all eight units do not have to be supplied
with instructions if they are not ready to execute. The first bit of every 32-bit instruction
determines if the next instruction belongs to the same execute packet as the previous
instruction, or whether it should be executed in the following clock as a part of the next execute
packet. Fetch packets are always 256 bits wide; however, the execute packets can vary in size.
The variable-length execute packets are a key memory-saving feature, distinguishing the C64x
CPUs from other VLIW architectures. The C64x VelociTI.2 extensions add enhancements to
the TMS320C62x DSP VelociTI architecture. These enhancements include:
CPU (DSP Core) Description
Another key feature of the C64x CPU is the load/store architecture, where all instructions
operate on registers (as opposed to data in memory). Two sets of data-addressing units (.D1
and .D2) are responsible for all data transfers between the register files and the memory. The
data address driven by the .D units allows data addresses generated from one register file to be
used to load or store data to or from the other register file. The C64x .D units can load and store
bytes (8 bits), half-words (16 bits), and words (32 bits) with a single instruction. And with the new
data path extensions, the C64x .D unit can load and store doublewords (64 bits) with a single
instruction. Furthermore, the non-aligned load and store instructions allow the .D units to access
words and doublewords on any byte boundary. The C64x CPU supports a variety of indirect
addressing modes using either linear- or circular-addressing with 5- or 15-bit offsets. All
instructions are conditional, and most can access any one of the 64 registers. Some registers,
however, are singled out to support specific addressing modes or to hold the condition for
conditional instructions (if the condition is not automatically “true”).
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The two .M functional units perform all multiplication operations. Each of the C64x .M units can
perform two 16 × 16-bit multiplies or four 8 × 8-bit multiplies per clock cycle. The .M unit can also
perform 16 × 32-bit multiply operations, dual 16 × 16-bit multiplies with add/subtract operations,
and quad 8 × 8-bit multiplies with add operations. In addition to standard multiplies, the C64x .M
units include bit-count, rotate, Galois field multiplies, and bidirectional variable shift hardware.
The two .S and .L functional units perform a general set of arithmetic, logical, and branch
functions with results available every clock cycle. The arithmetic and logical functions on the
C64x CPU include single 32-bit, dual 16-bit, and quad 8-bit operations.
The processing flow begins when a 256-bit-wide instruction fetch packet is fetched from a
program memory. The 32-bit instructions destined for the individual functional units are “linked”
together by “1” bits in the least significant bit (LSB) position of the instructions. The instructions
that are “chained” together for simultaneous execution (up to eight in total) compose an execute
packet. A “0” in the LSB of an instruction breaks the chain, effectively placing the instructions
that follow it in the next execute packet. A C64x DSP device enhancement now allows execute
packets to cross fetch-packet boundaries. In the TMS320C62x/TMS320C67x DSP devices, if
an execute packet crosses the fetch-packet boundary (256 bits wide), the assembler places it in
the next fetch packet, while the remainder of the current fetch packet is padded with NOP
instructions. In the C64x DSP device, the execute boundary restrictions have been removed,
thereby, eliminating all of the NOPs added to pad the fetch packet, and thus, decreasing the
overall code size. The number of execute packets within a fetch packet can vary from one to
eight. Execute packets are dispatched to their respective functional units at the rate of one per
clock cycle and the next 256-bit fetch packet is not fetched until all the execute packets from the
current fetch packet have been dispatched. After decoding, the instructions simultaneously drive
all active functional units for a maximum execution rate of eight instructions every clock cycle.
While most results are stored in 32-bit registers, they can be subsequently moved to memory as
bytes, half-words, or doublewords. All load and store instructions are byte-, half-word-, word-, or
doubleword-addressable.
For more details on the C64x CPU functional units enhancements, see the following documents:
22
•
TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189)
•
TMS320C64x Technical Overview (literature number SPRU395)
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
CPU (DSP Core) Description
src1
.L1
src2
dst
long dst
long src
ST1b (Store Data)
ST1a (Store Data)
8
8
32 MSBs
32 LSBs
long src
long dst
dst
.S1 src1
Data Path A
8
8
Register
File A
(A0–A31)
src2
See Note A
See Note A
long dst
dst
.M1 src1
src2
DA1 (Address)
.D1
dst
src1
src2
PRODUCT PREVIEW
LD1b (Load Data)
LD1a (Load Data)
32 MSBs
32 LSBs
2X
1X
src2
.D2
DA2 (Address)
LD2a (Load Data)
LD2b (Load Data)
src1
dst
32 LSBs
32 MSBs
src2
.M2 src1
dst
See Note A
See Note A
long dst
Register
File B
(B0– B31)
src2
Data Path B
.S2
src1
dst
long dst
long src
ST2a (Store Data)
ST2b (Store Data)
8
8
32 MSBs
32 LSBs
long src
long dst
dst
8
8
.L2 src2
src1
Control Register
File
NOTE A: For the .M functional units, the long dst is 32 MSBs and the dst is 32 LSBs.
Figure 1–4. TMS320C64x CPU (DSP Core) Data Paths
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
23
Memory Map Summary
1.8
Memory Map Summary
Table 1–2 shows the memory map address ranges of the C6412 device. Internal memory is
always located at address 0 and can be used as both program and data memory. The external
memory address ranges in the C6412 device begin at the hex address location 0x8000 0000 for
EMIFA.
Table 1–2. TMS320C6412 Memory Map Summary
BLOCK SIZE
(BYTES)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
Internal RAM (L2)
256K
0000 0000 – 0003 FFFF
Reserved
768K
0004 0000 – 000F FFFF
Reserved
23M
0010 0000 – 017F FFFF
External Memory Interface A (EMIFA) Registers
256K
0180 0000 – 0183 FFFF
L2 Registers
256K
0184 0000 – 0187 FFFF
HPI Registers
256K
0188 0000 – 018B FFFF
McBSP 0 Registers
256K
018C 0000 – 018F FFFF
McBSP 1 Registers
256K
0190 0000 – 0193 FFFF
Timer 0 Registers
256K
0194 0000 – 0197 FFFF
Timer 1 Registers
256K
0198 0000 – 019B FFFF
Interrupt Selector Registers
256K
019C 0000 – 019F FFFF
EDMA RAM and EDMA Registers
256K
01A0 0000 – 01A3 FFFF
Reserved
512K
01A4 0000 – 01AB FFFF
Timer 2 Registers
256K
01AC 0000 – 01AF FFFF
256K – 4K
01B0 0000 – 01B3 EFFF
Device Configuration Registers
4K
01B3 F000 – 01B3 FFFF
I2C0 Data and Control Registers
16K
01B4 0000 – 01B4 3FFF
Reserved
496K
01B4 4000 – 01BB BFFF
Emulation
256K
01BC 0000 – 01BF FFFF
PCI Registers
256K
01C0 0000 – 01C3 FFFF
Reserved
256K
01C4 0000 – 01C7 FFFF
EMAC Control
4K
01C8 0000 – 01C8 0FFF
EMAC Wrapper
8K
01C8 1000 – 01C8 2FFF
EWRAP Registers
2K
01C8 3000 – 01C8 37FF
MDIO Control Registers
2K
01C8 3800 – 01C8 3FFF
3.5M
01C8 4000 – 01FF FFFF
PRODUCT PREVIEW
MEMORY BLOCK DESCRIPTION
GP0 Registers
Reserved
QDMA Registers
52
0200 0000 – 0200 0033
928M – 52
0200 0034 – 2FFF FFFF
McBSP 0 Data
64M
3000 0000 – 33FF FFFF
McBSP 1 Data
64M
3400 0000 – 37FF FFFF
Reserved
64M
3800 0000 – 3BFF FFFF
Reserved
64M – 1M
3C10 0000 – 3FFF FFFF
Reserved
832M
4000 0000 – 73FF FFFF
Reserved
192M
7400 0000 – 75FF FFFF
Reserved
192M
7600 0000 – 77FF FFFF
Reserved
24
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Memory Map Summary
Table 1–2. TMS320C6412 Memory Map Summary (Continued)
BLOCK SIZE
(BYTES)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
Reserved
192M
7800 0000 – 79FF FFFF
Reserved
192M
7A00 0000 – 7BFF FFFF
Reserved
192M
7C00 0000 – 7DFF FFFF
Reserved
192M
7E00 0000 – 7FFF FFFF
EMIFA CE0
256M
8000 0000 – 8FFF FFFF
EMIFA CE1
256M
9000 0000 – 9FFF FFFF
EMIFA CE2
256M
A000 0000 – AFFF FFFF
EMIFA CE3
256M
B000 0000 – BFFF FFFF
1G
C000 0000 – FFFF FFFF
MEMORY BLOCK DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Reserved
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
25
Peripheral Register Descriptions
1.9
Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 1–3 through Table 1–23 identify the peripheral registers for the C6412 device by their
register names, acronyms, and hex address or hex address range. For more detailed
information on the register contents, bit names and their descriptions, see the TMS320C6000
Peripherals Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190).
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 1–3. EMIFA Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0180 0000
GBLCTL
EMIFA global control
REGISTER NAME
0180 0004
CECTL1
EMIFA CE1 space control
0180 0008
CECTL0
EMIFA CE0 space control
0180 000C
–
0180 0010
CECTL2
EMIFA CE2 space control
0180 0014
CECTL3
EMIFA CE3 space control
COMMENTS
Reserved
0180 0018
SDCTL
EMIFA SDRAM control
0180 001C
SDTIM
EMIFA SDRAM refresh control
0180 0020
SDEXT
EMIFA SDRAM extension
0180 0024 – 0180 0040
–
0180 0044
CESEC1
Reserved
EMIFA CE1 space secondary control
EMIFA CE0 space secondary control
0180 0048
CESEC0
0180 004C
–
0180 0050
CESEC2
EMIFA CE2 space secondary control
0180 0054
CESEC3
EMIFA CE3 space secondary control
0180 0058 – 0183 FFFF
–
Reserved
Reserved
Table 1–4. L2 Cache Registers (C64x)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0184 0000
CCFG
0184 2000
L2ALLOC0
L2 allocation register 0
0184 2004
L2ALLOC1
L2 allocation register 1
–
0184 2008
L2ALLOC2
L2 allocation register 2
L2ALLOC3
L2 allocation register 3
0184 4000
L2FBAR
L2 flush base address register
0184 4004
L2FWC
L2 flush word count register
0184 4010
L2CBAR
L2 clean base address register
0184 4014
L2CWC
L2 clean word count register
0184 4020
L1PFBAR
L1P flush base address register
0184 4024
L1PFWC
L1P flush word count register
0184 4030
L1DFBAR
L1D flush base address register
0184 4034
L1DFWC
L1D flush word count register
–
Reserved
Reserved
0184 5000
L2FLUSH
L2 flush register
0184 5004
L2CLEAN
L2 clean register
SPRS219A
COMMENTS
Reserved
0184 200C
–
26
REGISTER NAME
Cache configuration register
April 2003 – May 2003
Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 1–4. L2 Cache Registers (C64x) (Continued)
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
–
Reserved
0184 8000 –0184 81FC
MAR0 to
MAR127
Reserved
0184 8200
MAR128
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8000 0000 – 80FF FFFF
0184 8204
MAR129
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8100 0000 – 81FF FFFF
0184 8208
MAR130
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8200 0000 – 82FF FFFF
0184 820C
MAR131
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8300 0000 – 83FF FFFF
0184 8210
MAR132
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8400 0000 – 84FF FFFF
0184 8214
MAR133
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8500 0000 – 85FF FFFF
0184 8218
MAR134
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8600 0000 – 86FF FFFF
0184 821C
MAR135
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8700 0000 – 87FF FFFF
0184 8220
MAR136
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8800 0000 – 88FF FFFF
0184 8224
MAR137
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8900 0000 – 89FF FFFF
0184 8228
MAR138
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8A00 0000 – 8AFF FFFF
0184 822C
MAR139
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8B00 0000 – 8BFF FFFF
0184 8230
MAR140
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8C00 0000 – 8CFF FFFF
0184 8234
MAR141
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8D00 0000 – 8DFF FFFF
0184 8238
MAR142
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8E00 0000 – 8EFF FFFF
0184 823C
MAR143
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8F00 0000 – 8FFF FFFF
0184 8240
MAR144
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9000 0000 – 90FF FFFF
0184 8244
MAR145
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9100 0000 – 91FF FFFF
0184 8248
MAR146
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9200 0000 – 92FF FFFF
0184 824C
MAR147
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9300 0000 – 93FF FFFF
0184 8250
MAR148
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9400 0000 – 94FF FFFF
0184 8254
MAR149
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9500 0000 – 95FF FFFF
0184 8258
MAR150
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9600 0000 – 96FF FFFF
0184 825C
MAR151
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9700 0000 – 97FF FFFF
0184 8260
MAR152
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9800 0000 – 98FF FFFF
0184 8264
MAR153
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9900 0000 – 99FF FFFF
0184 8268
MAR154
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9A00 0000 – 9AFF FFFF
0184 826C
MAR155
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9B00 0000 – 9BFF FFFF
0184 8270
MAR156
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9C00 0000 – 9CFF FFFF
0184 8274
MAR157
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9D00 0000 – 9DFF FFFF
0184 8278
MAR158
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9E00 0000 – 9EFF FFFF
0184 827C
MAR159
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9F00 0000 – 9FFF FFFF
0184 8280
MAR160
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A000 0000 – A0FF FFFF
0184 8284
MAR161
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A100 0000 – A1FF FFFF
0184 8288
MAR162
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A200 0000 – A2FF FFFF
0184 828C
MAR163
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A300 0000 – A3FF FFFF
0184 8290
MAR164
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A400 0000 – A4FF FFFF
0184 8294
MAR165
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A500 0000 – A5FF FFFF
0184 8298
MAR166
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A600 0000 – A6FF FFFF
April 2003 – May 2003
COMMENTS
PRODUCT PREVIEW
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
SPRS219A
27
Peripheral Register Descriptions
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 1–4. L2 Cache Registers (C64x) (Continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0184 829C
MAR167
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A700 0000 – A7FF FFFF
0184 82A0
MAR168
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A800 0000 – A8FF FFFF
0184 82A4
MAR169
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A900 0000 – A9FF FFFF
0184 82A8
MAR170
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AA00 0000 – AAFF FFFF
0184 82AC
MAR171
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AB00 0000 – ABFF FFFF
0184 82B0
MAR172
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AC00 0000 – ACFF FFFF
0184 82B4
MAR173
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AD00 0000 – ADFF FFFF
0184 82B8
MAR174
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AE00 0000 – AEFF FFFF
0184 82BC
MAR175
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AF00 0000 – AFFF FFFF
0184 82C0
MAR176
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B000 0000 – B0FF FFFF
0184 82C4
MAR177
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B100 0000 – B1FF FFFF
0184 82C8
MAR178
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B200 0000 – B2FF FFFF
0184 82CC
MAR179
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B300 0000 – B3FF FFFF
0184 82D0
MAR180
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B400 0000 – B4FF FFFF
0184 82D4
MAR181
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B500 0000 – B5FF FFFF
0184 82D8
MAR182
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B600 0000 – B6FF FFFF
0184 82DC
MAR183
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B700 0000 – B7FF FFFF
0184 82E0
MAR184
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B800 0000 – B8FF FFFF
0184 82E4
MAR185
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B900 0000 – B9FF FFFF
0184 82E8
MAR186
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BA00 0000 – BAFF FFFF
0184 82EC
MAR187
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BB00 0000 – BBFF FFFF
0184 82F0
MAR188
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BC00 0000 – BCFF FFFF
0184 82F4
MAR189
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BD00 0000 – BDFF FFFF
0184 82F8
MAR190
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BE00 0000 – BEFF FFFF
0184 82FC
MAR191
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BF00 0000 – BFFF FFFF
0184 8300 –0184 83FC
MAR192 to
MAR255
Reserved
0184 8400 –0187 FFFF
–
Reserved
COMMENTS
Table 1–5. Quick DMA (QDMA) and Pseudo Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0200 0000
QOPT
QDMA options parameter register
0200 0004
QSRC
QDMA source address register
0200 0008
QCNT
QDMA frame count register
0200 000C
QDST
QDMA destination address register
0200 0010
QIDX
QDMA index register
0200 0014 – 0200 001C
28
REGISTER NAME
Reserved
0200 0020
QSOPT
QDMA pseudo options register
0200 0024
QSSRC
QDMA psuedo source address register
0200 0028
QSCNT
QDMA psuedo frame count register
0200 002C
QSDST
QDMA destination address register
0200 0030
QSIDX
QDMA psuedo index register
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 1–6. EDMA Registers (C64x)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01A0 0800 – 01A0 FF98
–
REGISTER NAME
01A0 FF9C
EPRH
Event polarity high register
01A0 FFA4
CIPRH
Channel interrupt pending high register
01A0 FFA8
CIERH
Channel interrupt enable high register
01A0 FFAC
CCERH
Channel chain enable high register
01A0 FFB0
ERH
01A0 FFB4
EERH
Event enable high register
Reserved
01A0 FFB8
ECRH
Event clear high register
01A0 FFBC
ESRH
Event set high register
01A0 FFC0
PQAR0
Priority queue allocation register 0
01A0 FFC4
PQAR1
Priority queue allocation register 1
01A0 FFC8
PQAR2
Priority queue allocation register 2
01A0 FFCC
PQAR3
Priority queue allocation register 3
01A0 FFDC
EPRL
Event polarity low register
01A0 FFE0
PQSR
Priority queue status register
01A0 FFE4
CIPRL
Channel interrupt pending low register
01A0 FFE8
CIERL
Channel interrupt enable low register
01A0 FFEC
CCERL
Channel chain enable low register
01A0 FFF0
ERL
01A0 FFF4
EERL
Event enable low register
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Event high register
Event low register
01A0 FFF8
ECRL
Event clear low register
01A0 FFFC
ESRL
Event set low register
01A1 0000 – 01A3 FFFF
–
Reserved
Table 1–7. EDMA Parameter RAM (C64x)†
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01A0 0000 – 01A0 0017
–
Parameters for Event 0 (6 words)
01A0 0018 – 01A0 002F
–
Parameters for Event 1 (6 words)
01A0 0030 – 01A0 0047
–
Parameters for Event 2 (6 words)
01A0 0048 – 01A0 005F
–
Parameters for Event 3 (6 words)
01A0 0060 – 01A0 0077
–
Parameters for Event 4 (6 words)
01A0 0078 – 01A0 008F
–
Parameters for Event 5 (6 words)
01A0 0090 – 01A0 00A7
–
Parameters for Event 6 (6 words)
01A0 00A8 – 01A0 00BF
–
Parameters for Event 7 (6 words)
01A0 00C0 – 01A0 00D7
–
Parameters for Event 8 (6 words)
01A0 00D8 – 01A0 00EF
–
Parameters for Event 9 (6 words)
01A0 00F0 – 01A0 00107
–
Parameters for Event 10 (6 words)
01A0 0108 – 01A0 011F
–
Parameters for Event 11 (6 words)
01A0 0120 – 01A0 0137
–
Parameters for Event 12 (6 words)
01A0 0138 – 01A0 014F
–
Parameters for Event 13 (6 words)
01A0 0150 – 01A0 0167
–
Parameters for Event 14 (6 words)
01A0 0168 – 01A0 017F
–
Parameters for Event 15 (6 words)
April 2003 – May 2003
COMMENTS
Parameters for Event 0
(6 words) or Reload/Link
Parameters for other Event
SPRS219A
29
Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 1–7. EDMA Parameter RAM (C64x)† (Continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01A0 0150 – 01A0 0167
–
Parameters for Event 16 (6 words)
01A0 0168 – 01A0 017F
–
Parameters for Event 17 (6 words)
...
COMMENTS
...
01A0 05D0 – 01A0 05E7
–
Parameters for Event 62 (6 words)
01A0 05E8 – 01A0 05FF
–
Parameters for Event 63 (6 words)
01A0 0600 – 01A0 0617
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 0 (6 words)
01A0 0618 – 01A0 062F
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 1 (6 words)
...
Reload/Link Parameters for
other Event 0–15
...
01A0 07E0 – 01A0 07F7
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 20 (6 words)
01A0 07F8 – 01A0 07FF
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 21 (6 words)
01A0 0800 – 01A0 0817
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 22 (6 words)
...
PRODUCT PREVIEW
REGISTER NAME
...
01A0 13C8 – 01A0 13DF
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 147 (6 words)
01A0 13E0 – 01A0 13F7
–
Reload/link parameters for Event 148 (6 words)
01A0 13F8 – 01A0 13FF
–
Scratch pad area (2 words)
01A0 1400 – 01A3 FFFF
–
Reserved
† The C64x device has 213 EDMA parameters total: 64-Event/Reload channels and 149-Reload only parameter sets [six (6) words each] that can
be used to reload/link EDMA transfers.
Table 1–8. Interrupt Selector Registers (C64x)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
019C 0000
MUXH
Interrupt multiplexer high
Selects which interrupts drive CPU
interrupts 10–15 (INT10–INT15)
019C 0004
MUXL
Interrupt multiplexer low
Selects which interrupts drive CPU
interrupts 4–9 (INT04–INT09)
019C 0008
EXTPOL
External interrupt polarity
Sets the polarity of the external
interrupts (EXT_INT4–EXT_INT7)
019C 000C – 019C 01FF
–
019C 0200
PDCTL
019C 0204 – 019F FFFF
–
Reserved
Peripheral power-down control register (see
Table 1–9)
Reserved
Table 1–9. Peripheral Power-Down Control Register
30
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
019C 0200
PDCTL
SPRS219A
REGISTER NAME
Peripheral power-down control register
April 2003 – May 2003
Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 1–10. Ethernet MAC (EMAC) Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 0000
TXIDVER
01C8 0004
TXCONTROL
01C8 0008
TXTEARDOWN
01C8 000F
–
01C8 0010
RXIDVER
01C8 0014
RXCONTROL
01C8 0018
RXTEARDOWN
REGISTER NAME
Transmit Identification and Version Register
Transmit Control Register
Transmit Teardown Register
Reserved
Receive Identification and Version Register
Receive Control Register
Receive Teardown Register
01C8 001C – 01C8 00FF
–
01C8 0100
RXMBPENABLE
Receive Multicast/Broadcast/Promiscuous Channel Enable Register
01C8 0104
RXUNICASTSET
Receive Unicast Set Register
01C8 0108
RXUNICASTCLEAR
01C8 010C
RXMAXLEN
RXBUFFEROFFSET
01C8 0114
RXFILTERLOWTHRESH
Receive Unicast Clear Register
Receive Maximum Length Register
Receive Buffer Offset Register
Receive Filter Low Priority Packets Threshold Register
01C8 0118 – 01C8 011F
–
01C8 0120
RX0FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 0 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 0124
RX1FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 1 Flow Control Threshold Register
Reserved
01C8 0128
RX2FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 2 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 012C
RX3FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 3 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 0130
RX4FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 4 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 0134
RX5FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 5 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 0138
RX6FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 6 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 013C
RX7FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 7 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 0140
RX0FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 0 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 0144
RX1FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 1 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 0148
RX2FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 2 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 014C
RX3FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 3 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 0150
RX4FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 4 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 0154
RX5FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 5 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 0158
RX6FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 6 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 015C
RX7FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 7 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 0160
MACCONTROL
MAC Control Register
01C8 0164
MACSTATUS
MAC Status Register
01C8 0168
EMCONTROL
Emulation Control Register
01C8 016C
–
Reserved
01C8 0170
TXINTSTATRAW
01C8 0174
TXINTSTATMASKED
01C8 0178
TXINTMASKSET
01C8 017C
TXINTMASKCLEAR
01C8 0180
MACINVECTOR
MAC Input Vector Register
MAC EOI Vector Register
01C8 0184
MACEOIVECTOR
01C8 0188 – 01C8 018F
–
01C8 0190
RXINTSTATRAW
01C8 0194
RXINTSTATMASKED
April 2003 – May 2003
PRODUCT PREVIEW
01C8 0110
Reserved
Transmit Interrupt Status (Unmasked) Register
Transmit Interrupt Status (Masked) Register
Transmit Interrupt Mask Set Register
Transmit Interrupt Mask Clear Register
Reserved
Receive Interrupt Status (Unmasked) Register
Receive Interrupt Status (Masked) Register
SPRS219A
31
Peripheral Register Descriptions
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 1–10. Ethernet MAC (EMAC) Registers (Continued)
32
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 0198
RXINTMASKSET
01C8 019C
RXINTMASKCLEAR
01C8 01A0
MACINTSTATRAW
01C8 01A4
MACINTSTATMASKED
REGISTER NAME
Receive Interrupt Mask Set Register
Receive Interrupt Mask Clear Register
MAC Interrupt Status (Unmasked) Register
MAC Interrupt Status (Masked) Register
01C8 01A8
MACINTMASKSET
01C8 01AC
MACINTMASKCLEAR
MAC Interrupt Mask Set Register
01C8 01B0
MACADDRL0
MAC Address Channel 0 Lower Byte Register
01C8 01B4
MACADDRL1
MAC Address Channel 1 Lower Byte Register
01C8 01B8
MACADDRL2
MAC Address Channel 2 Lower Byte Register
01C8 01BC
MACADDRL3
MAC Address Channel 3 Lower Byte Register
01C8 01C0
MACADDRL4
MAC Address Channel 4 Lower Byte Register
01C8 01C4
MACADDRL5
MAC Address Channel 5 Lower Byte Register
MAC Interrupt Mask Clear Register
01C8 01C8
MACADDRL6
MAC Address Channel 6 Lower Byte Register
01C8 01CC
MACADDRL7
MAC Address Channel 7 Lower Byte Register
01C8 01D0
MACADDRM
MAC Address Middle Byte Register
01C8 01D4
MACADDRH
MAC Address High Bytes Register
01C8 01D8
MACHASH1
MAC Address Hash 1 Register
01C8 01DC
MACHASH2
MAC Address Hash 2 Register
01C8 01E0
BOFFTEST
Backoff Test Register
01C8 01E4
TPACETEST
Transmit Pacing Test Register
01C8 01E8
RXPAUSE
Receive Pause Timer Register
01C8 01EC
TXPAUSE
Transmit Pause Timer Register
01C8 01F0 – 01C8 01FF
–
01C8 0200
RXGOODFRAMES
Good Receive Frames Register
01C8 0204
RXBCASTFRAMES
Broadcast Receive Frames Register
01C8 0208
RXMCASTFRAMES
Multicast Receive Frames Register
01C8 020C
RXPAUSEFRAMES
Pause Receive Frames Register
01C8 0210
RXCRCERRORS
01C8 0214
RXALIGNCODEERRORS
01C8 0218
RXOVERSIZED
Reserved
Receive CRC Errors Register
Receive Alignment/Code Errors Register
Receive Oversized Frames Register
01C8 021C
RXJABBER
01C8 0220
RXUNDERSIZED
Receive Jabber Frames Register
Receive Undersized Frames Register
01C8 0224
RXFRAGMENTS
Receive Frame Fragments Register
01C8 0228
RXFILTERED
01C8 022C
RXQOSFILTERED
Filtered Receive Frames Register
Receive QOS Filtered Frames Register
01C8 0230
RXOCTETS
Receive Octet Frames Register
01C8 0234
TXGOODFRAMES
Good Transmit Frames Register
01C8 0238
TXBCASTFRAMES
Broadcast Transmit Frames Register
01C8 023C
TXMCASTFRAMES
Multicast Transmit Frames Register
01C8 0240
TXPAUSEFRAMES
Pause Transmit Frames Register
01C8 0244
TXDEFERRED
Deferred Transmit Frames Register
01C8 0248
TXCOLLISION
Collision Register
01C8 024C
TXSINGLECOLL
01C8 0250
TXMULTICOLL
SPRS219A
Single Collision Transmit Frames Register
Multiple Collision Transmit Frames Register
April 2003 – May 2003
Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 1–10. Ethernet MAC (EMAC) Registers (Continued)
ACRONYM
01C8 0254
TXEXCESSIVECOLL
01C8 0258
TXLATECOLL
REGISTER NAME
Excessive Collisions Register
Late Collisions Register
01C8 025C
TXUNDERRUN
01C8 0260
TXCARRIERSLOSS
Transmit Underrun Register
01C8 0264
TXOCTETS
01C8 0268
FRAME64
01C8 026C
FRAME65T127
Transmit and Receive 65 to 127 Octet Frames Register
01C8 0270
FRAME128T255
Transmit and Receive 128 to 255 Octet Frames Register
01C8 0274
FRAME256T511
Transmit and Receive 256 to 511 Octet Frames Register
Transmit Carrier Sense Errors Register
Transmit Octet Frames Register
Transmit and Receive 64 Octet Frames Register
01C8 0278
FRAME512T1023
Transmit and Receive 512 to 1023 Octet Frames Register
01C8 027C
FRAME1024TUP
Transmit and Receive 1024 or Above Octet Frames Register
01C8 0280
NETOCTETS
Network Octet Frames Register
01C8 0284
RXSOFOVERRUNS
Receive Start of Frame Overruns Register
01C8 0288
RXMOFOVERRUNS
Receive Middle of Frame Overruns Register
01C8 028C
RXDMAOVERRUNS
Receive DMA Overruns Register
01C8 0290 – 01C8 02FF
–
01C8 0300 – 01C8 03FF
RXFIFO
Processor Test Access
01C8 0400 – 01C8 04FF
TXFIFO
Processor Test Access
01C8 0500 – 01C8 05FF
–
01C8 0600
TX0HDP
Transmit Channel 0 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0604
TX1HDP
Transmit Channel 1 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0608
TX2HDP
Transmit Channel 2 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 060C
TX3HDP
Transmit Channel 3 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0610
TX4HDP
Transmit Channel 4 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0614
TX5HDP
Transmit Channel 5 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
Reserved
Reserved
01C8 0618
TX6HDP
Transmit Channel 6 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 061C
TX7HDP
Transmit Channel 7 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0620
RX0HDP
Receive Channel 0 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0624
RX1HDP
Receive Channel 1 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0628
RX2HDP
Receive Channel 2 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 062C
RX3HDP
Receive Channel 3 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0630
RX4HDP
Receive Channel 4 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0634
RX5HDP
Receive Channel 5 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0638
RX6HDP
Receive Channel 6 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 063C
RX7HDP
Receive Channel 7 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0640
TX0INTACK
Transmit Channel 0 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0644
TX1INTACK
Transmit Channel 1 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0648
TX2INTACK
Transmit Channel 2 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 064C
TX3INTACK
Transmit Channel 3 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0650
TX4INTACK
Transmit Channel 4 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0654
TX5INTACK
Transmit Channel 5 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0658
TX6INTACK
Transmit Channel 6 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 065C
TX7INTACK
Transmit Channel 7 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0660
RX0INTACK
Receive Channel 0 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
April 2003 – May 2003
PRODUCT PREVIEW
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
SPRS219A
33
Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 1–10. Ethernet MAC (EMAC) Registers (Continued)
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01C8 0664
RX1INTACK
Receive Channel 1 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0668
RX2INTACK
Receive Channel 2 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 066C
RX3INTACK
Receive Channel 3 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0670
RX4INTACK
Receive Channel 4 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0674
RX5INTACK
Receive Channel 5 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0678
RX6INTACK
Receive Channel 6 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 067C
RX7INTACK
Receive Channel 7 Interrupt Acknowledge Register
01C8 0680 – 01C8 06FF
–
Reserved
01C8 0700 – 01C8 077F
–
State RAM Test Access – Processor read and write access to head descriptor
pointers and interrupt acknowledge registers.
01C8 0780 – 01C8 0FFF
–
Reserved
PRODUCT PREVIEW
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
34
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 1–11. EMAC Wrapper
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 1000 – 01C8 1FFF
REGISTER NAME
EMAC Control Module Descriptor Memory
01C8 2000 – 01C8 2FFF
–
Reserved
Table 1–12. EWRAP Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 3000
EWTRCTRL
01C8 3004
EWCTL
01C8 3008
EWINTTCNT
01C8 300C – 01C8 37FF
–
REGISTER NAME
TR control
Interrupt control register
Interrupt timer count
Reserved
Table 1–13. Device Configuration Registers
ACRONYM
01B3 F000
PERCFG
Peripheral Configuration Register
Enables or disables specific
peripherals. This register is also
used for power-down of disabled
peripherals.
01B3 F004
DEVSTAT
Device Status Register
Read-only. Provides status of
the User’s device configuration
on reset.
01B3 F008
JTAGID
JTAG Identification Register
Read-only. Provides
JTAG ID of the device.
01B3 F00C – 01B3 F014
–
01B3 F018
PCFGLOCK
01B3 F01C – 01B3 FFFF
–
April 2003 – May 2003
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
32-bit
Reserved
Peripheral Configuration Lock Register
Reserved
SPRS219A
35
PRODUCT PREVIEW
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 1–14. McBSP 0 Registers
PRODUCT PREVIEW
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
018C 0000
DRR0
McBSP0 data receive register via Configuration Bus
0x3000 0000 – 0x33FF FFFF
DRR0
McBSP0 data receive register via Peripheral Bus
018C 0004
DXR0
McBSP0 data transmit register via Configuration Bus
0x3000 0000 – 0x33FF FFFF
DXR0
McBSP0 data transmit register via Peripheral Bus
018C 0008
SPCR0
018C 000C
RCR0
McBSP0 receive control register
018C 0010
XCR0
McBSP0 transmit control register
018C 0014
SRGR0
018C 0018
MCR0
018C 001C
RCERE00
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 0
018C 0020
XCERE00
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 0
018C 0024
PCR0
COMMENTS
The CPU and EDMA controller
can only read this register; they
cannot write to it.
McBSP0 serial port control register
McBSP0 sample rate generator register
McBSP0 multichannel control register
McBSP0 pin control register
018C 0028
RCERE10
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 1
018C 002C
XCERE10
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 1
018C 0030
RCERE20
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 2
018C 0034
XCERE20
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 2
018C 0038
RCERE30
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 3
018C 003C
XCERE30
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 3
018C 0040 – 018F FFFF
–
Reserved
Table 1–15. McBSP 1 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0190 0000
DRR1
McBSP1 data receive register via Configuration Bus
0x3400 0000 – 0x37FF FFFF
DRR1
McBSP1 data receive register via peripheral bus
0190 0004
DXR1
McBSP1 data transmit register via configuration bus
0x3400 0000 – 0x37FF FFFF
DXR1
McBSP1 data transmit register via peripheral bus
0190 0008
SPCR1
0190 000C
RCR1
McBSP1 receive control register
0190 0010
XCR1
McBSP1 transmit control register
0190 0014
SRGR1
36
McBSP1 serial port control register
McBSP1 sample rate generator register
0190 0018
MCR1
0190 001C
RCERE01
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 0
0190 0020
XCERE01
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 0
McBSP1 multichannel control register
0190 0024
PCR1
0190 0028
RCERE11
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 1
0190 002C
XCERE11
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 1
0190 0030
RCERE21
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 2
0190 0034
XCERE21
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 2
McBSP1 pin control register
0190 0038
RCERE31
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 3
0190 003C
XCERE31
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 3
0190 0040 – 0193 FFFF
–
SPRS219A
COMMENTS
The CPU and EDMA controller
can only read this register; they
cannot write to it.
Reserved
April 2003 – May 2003
Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 1–16. Timer 0 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
0194 0000
CTL0
Timer 0 control register
Determines the operating mode of the timer, monitors the
timer status, and controls the function of the TOUT pin.
0194 0004
PRD0
Timer 0 period register
Contains the number of timer input clock cycles to count.
This number controls the TSTAT signal frequency.
0194 0008
CNT0
Timer 0 counter register
Contains the current value of the incrementing counter.
0194 000C – 0197 FFFF
–
Reserved
Table 1–17. Timer 1 Registers
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
0198 0000
CTL1
Timer 1 control register
Determines the operating mode of the timer, monitors the
timer status, and controls the function of the TOUT pin.
0198 0004
PRD1
Timer 1 period register
Contains the number of timer input clock cycles to count.
This number controls the TSTAT signal frequency.
0198 0008
CNT1
Timer 1 counter register
Contains the current value of the incrementing counter.
0198 000C – 019B FFFF
–
Reserved
Table 1–18. Timer 2 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
01AC 0000
CTL2
Timer 2 control register
Determines the operating mode of the timer, monitors the
timer status.
01AC 0004
PRD2
Timer 2 period register
Contains the number of timer input clock cycles to count.
This number controls the TSTAT signal frequency.
01AC 0008
CNT2
Timer 2 counter register
Contains the current value of the incrementing counter.
01AC 000C – 01AF FFFF
–
Reserved
Table 1–19. HPI Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
–
HPID
HPI data register
REGISTER NAME
Host read/write access only
COMMENTS
0188 0000
HPIC
HPI control register
HPIC has both Host/CPU read/write access
0188 0004
HPIA
(HPIAW)†
HPI address register
(Write)
0188 0008
HPIA
(HPIAR)†
HPI address register
(Read)
HPIA has both Host/CPU read/write access
0188 0001 – 018B FFFF
–
Reserved
† Host access to the HPIA register updates both the HPIAW and HPIAR registers. The CPU can access HPIAW and HPIAR independently.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
37
PRODUCT PREVIEW
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 1–20. GP0 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01B0 0000
GPEN
GP0 enable register
REGISTER NAME
01B0 0004
GPDIR
GP0 direction register
01B0 0008
GPVAL
GP0 value register
01B0 000C
–
Reserved
01B0 0010
GPDH
GP0 delta high register
01B0 0014
GPHM
GP0 high mask register
01B0 0018
GPDL
GP0 delta low register
01B0 001C
GPLM
GP0 low mask register
01B0 0020
GPGC
GP0 global control register
01B0 0024
GPPOL
GP0 interrupt polarity register
01B0 0028 – 01B3 EFFF
–
Reserved
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 1–21. PCI Peripheral Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C0 0000
RSTSRC
DSP Reset source/status register
REGISTER NAME
01C0 0004
PMDCSR
Power management DSP control/status register
01C0 0008
PCIIS
PCI interrupt source register
01C0 000C
PCIIEN
PCI interrupt enable register
01C0 0010
DSPMA
DSP master address register
01C0 0014
PCIMA
PCI master address register
01C0 0018
PCIMC
PCI master control register
01C0 001C
CDSPA
Current DSP address register
01C0 0020
CPCIA
Current PCI address register
01C0 0024
CCNT
Current byte count register
01C0 0028
–
Reserved
01C0 002C – 01C1 FFEF
–
Reserved
0x01C1 FFF0
HSR
0x01C1 FFF4
HDCR
Host-to-DSP control register
0x01C1 FFF8
DSPP
DSP page register
0x01C1 FFFC
–
01C2 0000
EEADD
EEPROM address register
01C2 0004
EEDAT
EEPROM data register
EEPROM control register
01C2 0008
EECTL
01C2 000C – 01C2 FFFF
–
01C3 0000
PCI_TRCNTL
01C3 0004 – 01C3 FFFF
–
38
Host status register
SPRS219A
Reserved
Reserved
PCI transfer request control register
Reserved
April 2003 – May 2003
Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 1–22. MDIO Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 3800
VERSION
MDIO Version Register
REGISTER NAME
01C8 3804
CONTROL
MDIO Control Register
01C8 3808
ALIVE
01C8 380C
LINK
MDIO PHY Alive Indication Register
MDIO PHY Link Status Register
01C8 3810
LINKINTRAW
01C8 3814
LINKINTMASKED
MDIO Link Status Change Interrupt Register
MDIO Link Status Change Interrupt (Masked) Register
01C8 3818
USERINTRAW
01C8 381C
USERINTMASKED
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt Register
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt (Masked) Register
01C8 3820
USERINTMASKSET
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt Mask Set Register
01C8 3824
USERINTMASKCLEAR
01C8 3828
USERACCESS0
MDIO User Access Register 0
01C8 382C
USERACCESS1
MDIO User Access Register 1
01C8 3830
USERPHYSEL0
MDIO User PHY Select Register 0
01C8 3834
USERPHYSEL1
MDIO User PHY Select Register 1
01C8 3838 – 01C8 3FFF
–
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt Mask Clear Register
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Reserved
Table 1–23. I2C0 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01B4 0000
I2COAR0
I2C0 own address register
REGISTER NAME
01B4 0004
I2CIER0
I2C0 interrupt enable register
01B4 0008
I2CSTR0
I2C0 interrupt status register
01B4 000C
I2CCLKL0
I2C0 clock low-time divider register
01B4 0010
I2CCLKH0
I2C0 clock high-time divider register
01B4 0014
I2CCNT0
I2C0 data count register
01B4 0018
I2CDRR0
I2C0 data receive register
01B4 001C
I2CSAR0
I2C0 slave address register
01B4 0020
I2CDXR0
I2C0 data transmit register
01B4 0024
I2CMDR0
I2C0 mode register
01B4 0028
I2CISRC0
I2C0 interrupt source register
01B4 002C
–
Reserved
01B4 0030
I2CPSC0
I2C0 prescaler register
01B4 0034
I2CPID10
I2C0 Peripheral Identification register 1 [Value: 0x0000 0101]
01B4 0038
I2CPID20
I2C0 Peripheral Identification register 2 [Value: 0x0000 0005]
01B4 003C – 01B4 3FFF
–
April 2003 – May 2003
Reserved
SPRS219A
39
EDMA Channel Synchronization Events
1.10 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events
The C64x EDMA supports up to 64 EDMA channels which service peripheral devices and
external memory. Table 1–24 lists the source of C64x EDMA synchronization events associated
with each of the programmable EDMA channels. For the C6412 device, the association of an
event to a channel is fixed; each of the EDMA channels has one specific event associated with
it. These specific events are captured in the EDMA event registers (ERL, ERH) even if the
events are disabled by the EDMA event enable registers (EERL, EERH). The priority of each
event can be specified independently in the transfer parameters stored in the EDMA parameter
RAM. For more detailed information on the EDMA module and how EDMA events are enabled,
captured, processed, linked, chained, and cleared, etc., see the EDMA Controller chapter of the
TMS320C6000 Peripherals Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190).
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 1–24. TMS320C6412 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events†
EDMA
CHANNEL
EVENT NAME
0
DSP_INT
1
TINT0
Timer 0 interrupt
2
TINT1
Timer 1 interrupt
EVENT DESCRIPTION
HPI/PCI-to-DSP interrupt
3
SD_INTA
4
GPINT4/EXT_INT4
GP0 event 4/External interrupt pin 4
5
GPINT5/EXT_INT5
GP0 event 5/External interrupt pin 5
6
GPINT6/EXT_INT6
GP0 event 6/External interrupt pin 6
7
GPINT7/EXT_INT7
GP0 event 7/External interrupt pin 7
8
GPINT0
GP0 event 0
9
GPINT1
GP0 event 1
10
GPINT2
GP0 event 2
11
GPINT3
GP0 event 3
12
XEVT0
McBSP0 transmit event
13
REVT0
McBSP0 receive event
14
XEVT1
McBSP1 transmit event
McBSP1 receive event
15
REVT1
16–18
–
EMIFA SDRAM timer interrupt
None
19
TINT2
20–43
–
Timer 2 interrupt
44
ICREVT0
I2C0 receive event
I2C0 transmit event
None
45
ICXEVT0
46–47
–
48
GPINT8
GP0 event 8
49
GPINT9
GP0 event 9
50
GPINT10
GP0 event 10
51
GPINT11
GP0 event 11
52
GPINT12
None
GP0 event 12
† In addition to the events shown in this table, each of the 64 channels can also be synchronized with the transfer completion or alternate transfer
completion events. For more detailed information on EDMA event-transfer chaining, see the EDMA Controller chapter of the TMS320C6000
Peripherals Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190).
40
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
EDMA Channel Synchronization Events
Table 1–24. TMS320C6412 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events† (Continued)
EDMA
CHANNEL
EVENT NAME
53
GPINT13
GP0 event 13
54
GPINT14
GP0 event 14
55
GPINT15
GP0 event 15
EVENT DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT PREVIEW
56–63
–
None
† In addition to the events shown in this table, each of the 64 channels can also be synchronized with the transfer completion or alternate transfer
completion events. For more detailed information on EDMA event-transfer chaining, see the EDMA Controller chapter of the TMS320C6000
Peripherals Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190).
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
41
Interrupt Sources and Interrupt Selector
1.11 Interrupt Sources and Interrupt Selector
The C64x DSP core supports 16 prioritized interrupts, which are listed in Table 1–25. The
highest-priority interrupt is INT_00 (dedicated to RESET) while the lowest-priority interrupt is
INT_15. The first four interrupts (INT_00–INT_03) are non-maskable and fixed. The remaining
interrupts (INT_04–INT_15) are maskable and default to the interrupt source specified in
Table 1–25. The interrupt source for interrupts 4–15 can be programmed by modifying the
selector value (binary value) in the corresponding fields of the Interrupt Selector Control
registers: MUXH (address 0x019C0000) and MUXL (address 0x019C0004).
Table 1–25. C6412 DSP Interrupts
INTERRUPT
SELECTOR
CONTROL
REGISTER
SELECTOR
VALUE
(BINARY)
INTERRUPT
EVENT
INT_00†
INT_01†
–
–
RESET
–
–
NMI
INT_02†
INT_03†
–
–
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
–
–
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
INT_04‡
INT_05‡
MUXL[4:0]
00100
GPINT4/EXT_INT4
GP0 interrupt 4/External interrupt pin 4
MUXL[9:5]
00101
GPINT5/EXT_INT5
GP0 interrupt 5/External interrupt pin 5
INT_06‡
INT_07‡
MUXL[14:10]
00110
GPINT6/EXT_INT6
GP0 interrupt 6/External interrupt pin 6
MUXL[20:16]
00111
GPINT7/EXT_INT7
GP0 interrupt 7/External interrupt pin 7
INT_08‡
INT_09‡
MUXL[25:21]
01000
EDMA_INT
EDMA channel (0 through 63) interrupt
MUXL[30:26]
01001
EMU_DTDMA
INT_10‡
INT_11‡
MUXH[4:0]
00011
SD_INTA
MUXH[9:5]
01010
EMU_RTDXRX
EMU real-time data exchange (RTDX) receive
INT_12‡
INT_13‡
MUXH[14:10]
01011
EMU_RTDXTX
EMU RTDX transmit
MUXH[20:16]
00000
DSP_INT
INT_14‡
INT_15‡
MUXH[25:21]
00001
TINT0
Timer 0 interrupt
MUXH[30:26]
00010
TINT1
Timer 1 interrupt
–
–
01100
XINT0
McBSP0 transmit interrupt
–
–
01101
RINT0
McBSP0 receive interrupt
–
–
01110
XINT1
McBSP1 transmit interrupt
–
–
01111
RINT1
McBSP1 receive interrupt
–
–
10000
GPINT0
–
–
10001
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
–
–
10010
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
–
–
10011
TINT2
–
–
10100
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
–
–
10101
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
–
–
10110
ICINT0
–
–
10111
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
–
–
11000
EMAC_MDIO_INT
EMAC/MDIO interrupt
–
–
11001 – 11111
Reserved
PRODUCT PREVIEW
CPU
INTERRUPT
NUMBER
INTERRUPT SOURCE
EMU DTDMA
EMIFA SDRAM timer interrupt
HPI/PCI-to-DSP interrupt
GP0 interrupt 0
Timer 2 interrupt
I2C0 interrupt
Reserved. Do not use.
† Interrupts INT_00 through INT_03 are non-maskable and fixed.
‡ Interrupts INT_04 through INT_15 are programmable by modifying the binary selector values in the Interrupt Selector Control registers fields.
Table 1–25 shows the default interrupt sources for Interrupts INT_04 through INT_15. For more detailed information on interrupt sources and
selection, see the Interrupt Selector and External Interrupts chapter of the TMS320C6000 Peripherals Reference Guide (literature number
SPRU190).
42
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Signal Groups Description
1.12 Signal Groups Description
TMS
TDO
TDI
TCK
TRST
EMU0
EMU1
EMU2
EMU3
EMU4
EMU5
EMU6
EMU7
EMU8
EMU9
EMU10
EMU11
Reset and
Interrupts
Clock/PLL
RESET
NMI
GP0[7]/EXT_INT7‡
GP0[6]/EXT_INT6‡
GP0[5]/EXT_INT5‡
GP0[4]/EXT_INT4‡
RSV
RSV
RSV
Reserved
IEEE Standard
1149.1
(JTAG)
Emulation
PRODUCT PREVIEW
CLKIN
CLKOUT4/GP0[1]†
CLKOUT6/GP0[2]†
CLKMODE1
CLKMODE0
PLLV
RSV
RSV
RSV
Peripheral
Control/Status
PCI_EN
TOUT0/MAC_EN
Control/Status
GP0[15]/PRST§
GP0[14]/PCLK§
GP0[13]/PINTA§
GP0[12]/PGNT§
GP0[11]/PREQ§
GP0[10]/PCBE3§
GP0[9]/PIDSEL§
GP0[8]/PCI66§
GP0
GP0[7]/EXT_INT7‡
GP0[6]/EXT_INT6‡
GP0[5]/EXT_INT5‡
GP0[4]/EXT_INT4‡
GP0[3]/PCIEEAI
CLKOUT6/GP0[2]†
CLKOUT4/GP0[1]†
GP0[0]
General-Purpose Input/Output 0 (GP0) Port
† These pins are muxed with the GP0 pins and by default these signals function as clocks (CLKOUT4 or CLKOUT6). To use these
muxed pins as GPIO signals, the appropriate GPIO register bits (GPxEN and GPxDIR) must be properly enabled and configured.
For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
‡ These pins are GP0 pins that can also function as external interrupt sources (EXT_INT[7:4]). Default after reset is EXT_INTx or
GPIO as input-only.
§ These GP0 pins are muxed with the PCI peripheral pins and by default these signals are set up to no function with both the GPIO
and PCI pin functions disabled. For more details on these muxed pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
Figure 1–5. CPU and Peripheral Signals
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
43
Signal Groups Description
64
Data
AED[63:0]
AECLKIN
ACE3
ACE2
Memory Map
Space Select
ACE1
ACE0
20
AEA[22:3]
External
Memory I/F
Control
Address
ABE7
ABE6
ABE5
ABE4
ABE3
ABE2
PRODUCT PREVIEW
ABE1
ABE0
Byte Enables
Bus
Arbitration
AECLKOUT1
AECLKOUT2
ASDCKE
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE
AARDY
ASOE3
APDT
AHOLD
AHOLDA
ABUSREQ
EMIFA (64-bit)
Figure 1–6. Peripheral Signals
44
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Signal Groups Description
32
Data
HD[15:0]/AD[15:0]
HD[31:16]/AD[31:16] §
HCNTL0/PSTOP
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL
HPI†
(Host-Port Interface)
Register Select
Control
Half-Word
Select
HHWIL/PTRDY
(HPI16 ONLY)
HAS/PPAR
HR/W/PCBE2
HCS/PPERR
HDS1/PSERR
HDS2/PCBE1
HRDY/PIRDY
HINT/PFRAME
32
GP0[10]/PCBE3
HR/W/PCBE2
HDS2/PCBE1
PCBE0
GP0[12]/PGNT
Data/Address
Command
Byte Enable
Clock
Control
Arbitration
Error
GP0[11]/PREQ
Serial
EEPROM
GP0[14]/PCLK
GP0[9]/PIDSEL
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL
HINT/PFRAME
GP0[13]/PINTA
HAS/PPAR
GP0[15]/PRST
HRDY/PIRDY
HCNTL0/PSTOP
HHWIL/PTRDY
PRODUCT PREVIEW
HD[15:0]/AD[15:0]
HD[31:16]/AD[31:16] §
HDS1/PSERR
HCS/PPERR
XSP_DO/MDIO
XSP_CS
XSP_CLK/MDCLK
XSP_DI
PCI Interface‡
† These HPI pins are muxed with the PCI peripheral. By default, these signals function as HPI. For more details on these muxed pins,
see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
‡ These PCI pins (excluding PCBE0 and XSP_CS) are muxed with the HPI or MDIO or GP0 peripherals. By default, these signals function
as HPI and no function, respectively. For more details on these muxed pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
§ These HPI/PCI data pins (HD[31:16/AD[31:16]) are muxed with the EMAC peripheral. By default, these pins function as HPI. For more
details on the EMAC pin functions, see the Ethernet MAC (EMAC) peripheral signals section and the terminal functions table portions
of this data sheet.
Figure 1–6. Peripheral Signals (Continued)
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
45
Signal Groups Description
McBSP1
McBSP0
CLKX1
FSX1
DX1
Transmit
Transmit
CLKR1
FSR1
DR1
Receive
Receive
CLKS1
Clock
CLKX0
FSX0
DX0
CLKR0
FSR0
DR0
Clock
CLKS0
PRODUCT PREVIEW
McBSPs
(Multichannel Buffered
Serial Ports)
TOUT1/LENDIAN
TINP1
TOUT0/MACEN
TINP0
Timer 0
Timer 1
Timer 2
Timers
SCL0
I2C0
SDA0
I2C0
Figure 1–6. Peripheral Signals (Continued)
46
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Signal Groups Description
EMAC
HD16/AD16/MTXD0†
HD17/AD17/MTXD1†
HD18/AD18/MTXD2†
HD19/AD19/MTXD3†
Transmit
HD24/AD24/MRXD0†
HD25/AD25/MRXD1†
HD26/AD26/MRXD2†
HD27/AD27/MRXD3†
Receive
HD20/AD20/MTXEN†
HD29/AD29/MRXER†
HD28/AD28/MRXDV†
HD21/AD21/MCOL†
HD30/AD30/MCRS†
Error Detect
and Control
HD22/AD22/MTCLK†
HD31/AD31/MRCLK†
Clocks
MDIO
Clock
XSP_DO/MDIO‡
XSP_CLK/MDCLK‡
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Input/Output
Ethernet MAC (EMAC)
and MDIO
† These EMAC pins are muxed with the upper data pins of the HPI or PCI peripherals. By default, these signals function as HPI. For
more details on these muxed pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
‡ These MDIO pins are muxed with the PCI peripherals. By default, these signals function as PCI. For more details on these muxed
pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
Figure 1–6. Peripheral Signals (Continued)
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
47
Device Configurations
2
Device Configurations
On the C6412 device, bootmode and certain device configurations/peripheral selections are
determined at device reset, while other device configurations/peripheral selections are
software-configurable via the peripheral configurations register (PERCFG) [address location
0x01B3F000] after device reset.
2.1
Peripheral Selection at Device Reset
Some C6412 peripherals share the same pins (internally muxed) and are mutually exclusive
(i.e., HPI, general-purpose input/output pins GP0[15:9], PCI and its internal EEPROM, EMAC,
and MDIO). Other C6412 peripherals (i.e., the Timers, I2C0, and the GP0[7:0] pins), are always
available.
•
HPI, GP0[15:9], PCI, EEPROM (internal to PCI), and EMAC peripherals
The PCI_EN and MAC_EN pins are latched at reset. They determine specific peripheral selection,
summarized in Table 2–1.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 2–1. PCI_EN, HD5, and MAC_EN Peripheral Selection (HPI, GP0[15:9], PCI, EMAC, and MDIO)
PERIPHERAL SELECTION†
PERIPHERALS SELECTED
PCI_EN
Pin [E2]
PCI_EEAI
Pin [L5]
HD5
Pin [Y1]
MAC_EN
Pin [C5]
HPI Data
Lower
HPI Data
Upper
32-Bit PCI
EEPROM
(Internal
to PCI)
EMAC and
MDIO
GP0[15:9]
0
0
0
0
√
Hi-Z
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
√
0
0
0
1
√
Hi-Z
Disabled
Disabled
√
√
0
0
1
0
√
√
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
√
0
0
1
1
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
√
√
1
1
X
X
Disabled
√
√
Disabled
Disabled
•
If the PCI is disabled (PCI_EN = 0), the HPI peripheral is enabled and based on the HD5 and MAC_EN
pin configuration at reset, HPI16 mode or EMAC and MDIO can be selected. When the PCI is disabled
(PCI_EN = 0), the GP0[15:9] pins can also be programmed as GPIO, provided the GPxEN and GPxDIR
bits are properly configured.
This means all multiplexed HPI/PCI pins function as HPI and all standalone PCI pins (PCBE0 and
XSP_CS) are tied-off (Hi-Z). Also, the multiplexed GP0/PCI pins can be used as GPIO with the proper
software configuration of the GPIO enable and direction registers (for more details, see Table 2–9).
•
If the PCI is enabled (PCI_EN = 1), the HPI peripheral is disabled.
This means all multiplexed HPI/PCI pins function as PCI. Also, the multiplexed GP0/PCI pins function as
PCI pins (for more details, see Table 2–9).
48
•
The MAC_EN pin, in combination with the PCI_EN and HD5 pins, controls the selection of the EMAC and
MDIO peripherals (for more details, see Table 2–2).
•
The PCI_EN pin (= 1) and the PCI_EEAI pin control the whether the PCI initializes its internal registers
via external EEPROM (PCI_EEAI = 1) or if the internal default values are used instead (PCI_EEAI = 0).
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Device Configurations
Table 2–2. HPI vs. EMAC Peripheral Pin Selection
CONFIGURATION SELECTION†
PERIPHERALS SELECTED
GP0[0]
Pin [M5]†
HD5
Pin [Y1]
MAC_EN
Pin [C5]
HD[15:0]
HD[31:16]
0
0
0
HPI16
Hi-Z
0
0
1
HPI16
0
1
0
0
1
1
2.2
used for EMAC
HPI32 (HD[31:0])
Hi-Z
used for EMAC
Device Configuration at Device Reset
Table 2–3 describes the C6412 device configuration pins, which are set up via external
pullup/pulldown resistors through the specified EMIFA address bus pins (AEA[22:19]), and the
TOUT1/LENDIAN, GP0[3]/PCIEEAI, and the HD5 pins (all of which are latched during device
reset).
CONFIGURATION
PIN
NO.
TOUT1/LENDIAN
B5
AEA[22:21]
AEA[20:19]
GP0[3]/PCIEEAI
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Device Endian mode (LEND)
0 – System operates in Big Endian mode
1 – System operates in Little Endian mode (default)
[U23,
V24]
Bootmode [1:0]
00 – No boot (default mode)
01 – HPI/PCI boot (based on PCI_EN pin)
10 – Reserved
11 – EMIFA boot
[V25,
V26]
EMIFA input clock select
Clock mode select for EMIFA (AECLKIN_SEL[1:0])
00 – AECLKIN (default mode)
01 – CPU/4 Clock Rate
10 – CPU/6 Clock Rate
11 – Reserved
L5
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 2–3. C6412 Device Configuration Pins
(TOUT1/LENDIAN, AEA[22:19], GP0[3]/PCIEEAI, and HD5)
PCI EEPROM Auto-Initialization (PCIEEAI)
PCI auto-initialization via external EEPROM
0 – PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is disabled; the PCI peripheral uses the specified
PCI default values (default).
1 – PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is enabled; the PCI peripheral is configured
through EEPROM provided the PCI peripheral pin is enabled (PCI_EN = 1).
Note: If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin must not be pulled up.
For more information on the PCI EEPROM default values, see the PCI chapter of the TMS320C6000
Peripherals Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190).
HD5/AD5
Y1
HPI peripheral bus width (HPI_WIDTH)
0 – HPI operates as an HPI16.
(HPI bus is 16 bits wide. HD[15:0] pins are used and the remaining HD[31:16] pins are
reserved pins in the Hi-Z state.)
1 – HPI operates as an HPI32.
(HPI bus is 32 bits wide. All HD[31:0] pins are used for host-port operations.)
(Also see the PCI_EN; TOUT0/MAC_EN functional description in this table)
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
49
Device Configurations
Table 2–3. C6412 Device Configuration Pins
(TOUT1/LENDIAN, AEA[22:19], GP0[3]/PCIEEAI, and HD5) (Continued)
CONFIGURATION
PIN
NO.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Peripheral Selection
PCI_EN;
TOUT0/MAC_EN
2.3
00
01
10
11
[E2; C5]
–
–
–
–
HPI (default mode) [HPI32, if HD5 = 1; HPI16 if HD5 = 0
EMAC and MDIO; HPI16, if HD5 = 0; HPI disabled, if HD5 = 1
PCI
Reserved
Peripheral Selection After Device Reset
McBSP1, McBSP0, and I2C0
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The C6412 device has designated registers for peripheral configuration (PERCFG), device
status (DEVSTAT), and JTAG identification (JTAGID). These registers are part of the Device
Configuration module and are mapped to a 4K block memory starting at 0x01B3F000. The CPU
accesses these registers via the CFGBUS.
The peripheral configuration register (PERCFG), allows the user to control the peripheral
selection of the McBSP0, McBSP1, and I2C0 peripherals. For more detailed information on the
PERCFG register control bits, see Figure 2–1 and Table 2–4.
31
24
Reserved
R-0
16
23
Reserved
R-0
8
15
Reserved
R-0
7
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
I2C0EN
MCBSP1EN
MCBSP0EN
Reserved
R-0
R/W-0
R/W-1
R/W-1
R-0
Legend: R = Read only; R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
Figure 2–1. Peripheral Configuration Register (PERCFG) [Address Location: 0x01B3F000 – 0x01B3F003]
50
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Device Configurations
Table 2–4. Peripheral Configuration (PERCFG) Register Selection Bit Descriptions
BIT
NAME
31:4
Reserved
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Inter-integrated circuit 0 (I2C0) enable bit.
Selects whether I2C0 peripheral is enabled or disabled (default).
0 = I2C0 is disabled, and the module is powered down (default).
1 = I2C0 is enabled.
3
I2C0EN
2
MCBSP1EN
McBSP1 enable bit.
0 = Reserved. Do not use.
1 = McBSP1 is enabled (default).
1
MCBSP0EN
McBSP0 enable bit.
0 = Reserved. Do not use.
1 = McBSP0 is enabled (default).
0
Reserved
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
51
Device Configurations
2.3.1 Peripheral Configuration Lock
By default, the I2C peripheral is disabled on power up. In order to use this peripheral on the
C6412 device, the peripheral must first be enabled in the Peripheral Configuration register
(PERCFG). Software muxed pins should not be programmed to switch functionalities
during run-time. Care should also be taken to ensure that no accesses are being
performed before disabling the peripherals. To help minimize power consumption in the
C6412 device, unused peripherals may be disabled.
Figure 2–2 shows the flow needed to enable (or disable) a given peripheral on the C6412
device.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Unlock the PERCFG Register
Using the PCFGLOCK Register
Write to
PERCFG Register
to Enable/Disable Peripherals
Read from
PERCFG Register
Wait 128 CPU Cycles Before
Accessing Enabled Peripherals
Figure 2–2. Peripheral Enable/Disable Flow Diagram
52
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Device Configurations
A 32-bit key (value = 0x10C0010C) must be written to the Peripheral Configuration Lock register
(PCFGLOCK) in order to unlock access to the PERCFG register. Reading the PCFGLOCK
register determines whether the PERCFG register is currently locked (LOCKSTAT bit = 1) or
unlocked (LOCKSTAT bit = 0), see Figure 2–3. A peripheral can only be enabled when the
PERCFG register is “unlocked” (LOCKSTAT bit = 0).
Read Accesses
31
1
0
Reserved
LOCKSTAT
R-0
R-1
Write Accesses
31
0
LOCK
W-0
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Legend: R = Read only; R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
Figure 2–3. PCFGLOCK Register Diagram [Address Location: 0x01B3 F018] – Read/Write Accesses
Table 2–5. PCFGLOCK Register Selection Bit Descriptions – Read Accesses
BIT
NAME
31:1
Reserved
0
LOCKSTAT
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Lock status bit.
Determines whether the PERCFG register is locked or unlocked.
0 = Unlocked, read accesses to the PERCFG register allowed.
1 = Locked, write accesses to the PERCFG register do not modify the register state [default].
Reads are unaffected by Lock Status.
Table 2–6. PCFGLOCK Register Selection Bit Descriptions – Write Accesses
BIT
31:0
NAME
LOCK
DESCRIPTION
Lock bits.
0x10C0010C = Unlocks PERCFG register accesses.
Any write to the PERCFG register will automatically relock the register. In order to avoid the
unnecessary overhead of multiple unlock/enable sequences, all peripherals should be enabled
with a single write to the PERCFG register with the necessary enable bits set.
Prior to waiting 128 CPU cycles, the PERCFG register should be read. There is no direct
correlation between the CPU issuing a write to the PERCFG register and the write actually
occurring. Reading the PERCFG register after the write is issued forces the CPU to wait for the
write to the PERCFG register to occur.
Once a peripheral is enabled, the DSP (or other peripherals such as the HPI) must wait a
minimum of 128 CPU cycles before accessing the enabled peripheral. The user must ensure
that no accesses are performed to a peripheral while it is disabled.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
53
Device Configurations
2.3.2 Device Status Register Description
The device status register depicts the status of the device peripheral selection. For the actual
register bit names and their associated bit field descriptions, see Figure 2–4 and Table 2–7.
31
24
Reserved
R-0
16
23
Reserved
R-0
PRODUCT PREVIEW
15
11
10
9
8
Reserved
MAC_EN
HPI_WIDTH
PCI_EEAI
PCI_EN
R-0
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
14
13
12
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
CLKMODE1
CLKMODE0
LENDIAN
BOOTMODE1
BOOTMODE0
AECLKINSEL1
AECLKINSEL0
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
Legend: R = Read only; R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
Figure 2–4. Device Status Register (DEVSTAT) Description – 0x01B3 F004
Table 2–7. Device Status (DEVSTAT) Register Selection Bit Descriptions
BIT
NAME
DESCRIPTION
31:12
Reserved
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
11
MAC_EN
EMAC enable bit.
Shows the status of whether EMAC peripheral is enabled or disabled (default).
0 = EMAC is disabled, and the module is powered down (default).
1 = EMAC is enabled.
This bit has no effect if the PCI peripheral is enabled (PCI_EN = 1).
10
HPI_WIDTH
HPI bus width control bit.
Shows the status of whether the HPI bus operates in 32-bit mode or in 16-bit mode (default).
0 = HPI operates in 16-bit mode. (default).
1 = HPI operates in 32-bit mode.
PCI EEPROM auto-initialization bit (PCI auto-initialization via external EEPROM).
Shows the status of whether the PCI module initializes internal registers via external EEPROM or if the
internal PCI default values are used instead (default).
9
PCI_EEAI
8
PCI_EN
7
Reserved
0 = PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is disabled; the PCI peripheral uses the specified
PCI default values (default).
1 = PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is enabled; the PCI peripheral is configured
through EEPROM provided the PCI peripheral pin is enabled (PCI_EN = 1).
PCI enable bit.
Shows the status of whether the EMAC peripheral is enabled or disabled (default).
0 = PCI disabled. (default).
1 = PCI enabled.
Global select for the PCI vs. HPI/EMAC/MDIO/GPIO peripherals.
54
SPRS219A
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
April 2003 – May 2003
Device Configurations
Table 2–7. Device Status (DEVSTAT) Register Selection Bit Descriptions (Continued)
NAME
6
CLKMODE1
5
CLKMODE0
4
LENDIAN
3
BOOTMODE1
2
BOOTMODE0
1
AECLKINSEL1
0
AECLKINSEL0
DESCRIPTION
Clock mode select bits
Shows the status of whether the CPU clock frequency equals the input clock frequency X1 (Bypass), x6,
or x12.
Clock mode select for CPU clock frequency (CLKMODE[1:0])
00 – By
ass (x1) (default mode)
Bypass
01 – x6
10 – x12
11 – Reserved
For more details on the CLKMODE pins and the PLL multiply factors, see the Clock PLL section of this
data sheet.
Device Endian mode (LEND)
Shows the status of whether the system is operating in Big Endian mode or Little Endian mode (default).
0 – System is operating in Big Endian mode
1 – System is operating in Little Endian mode (default)
Bootmode configuration bits
Shows the status of what device bootmode configuration is operational.
Bootmode [1:0]
00 – No boot (default mode)
01 – HPI/PCI boot (based on PCI_EN pin)
10 – Reserved
11 – EMIFA boot
EMIFA input clock select
Shows the status of what clock mode is enabled or disabled for the EMIF.
Clock mode select for EMIFA (AECLKIN_SEL[1:0])
00 – AECLKIN (default mode)
01 – CPU/4 Clock Rate
10 – CPU/6 Clock Rate
11 – Reserved
2.3.3 JTAG ID Register Description
The JTAG ID register is a read-only register that identifies to the customer the JTAG/Device ID.
For the C6412 device, the JTAG ID register resides at address location 0x01B3 F004. The
register hex value for the C6412 device is: 0x0007 902F. For the actual register bit names and
their associated bit field descriptions, see Figure 2–5 and Table 2–8.
31–28
27–12
11–1
0
VARIANT (4-Bit)
PART NUMBER (16-Bit)
MANUFACTURER (11-Bit)
LSB
R-0000
R-0000 0000 0111 1001
R-0000 0010 111
R-1
Legend: R = Read only; -n = value after reset
Figure 2–5. JTAG ID Register Description – TMS320C6412 Register Value – 0x0007 902F
Table 2–8. JTAG ID Register Selection Bit Descriptions
BIT
NAME
31:28
VARIANT
27:12
PART NUMBER
11–1
MANUFACTURER
0
LSB
April 2003 – May 2003
DESCRIPTION
Variant (4-Bit) value. C6412 value: 0000.
Part Number (16-Bit) value. C6412 value: 0000 0000 0111 1001.
Manufacturer (11-Bit) value. C6412 value: 0000 0010 111.
LSB. This bit is read as a “1” for C6412.
SPRS219A
55
PRODUCT PREVIEW
BIT
Device Configurations
2.4
Multiplexed Pins
Multiplexed pins are pins that are shared by more than one peripheral and are internally
multiplexed. Some of these pins are configured by software, and the others are configured by
external pullup/pulldown resistors only at reset. Those muxed pins that are configured by
software should not be programmed to switch functionalities during run-time. Those muxed pins
that are configured by external pullup/pulldown resistors are mutually exclusive; only one
peripheral has primary control of the function of these pins after reset. Table 2–9 identifies the
multiplexed pins on the C6412 device; shows the default (primary) function and the default
settings after reset; and describes the pins, registers, etc. necessary to configure specific
multiplexed functions.
2.5
Debugging Considerations
PRODUCT PREVIEW
It is recommended that external connections be provided to device configuration pins, including
AEA[22:19], HD5/AD5, PCI_EN, and TOUT0/MAC_EN. Although internal pullup/pulldown
resistors exist on these pins, providing external connectivity adds convenience to the user in
debugging and flexibility in switching operating modes.
Internal pullup/pulldown resistors also exist on the non-configuration pins on the AEA bus
(AEA[18:0]). Do not oppose the internal pullup/pulldown resistors on these non-configuration
pins with external pullup/pulldown resistors. If an external controller provides signals to these
non-configuration pins, these signals must be driven to the default state of the pins at reset, or
not be driven at all.
For the internal pullup/pulldown resistors for all device pins, see the terminal functions table.
56
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Device Configurations
Table 2–9. C6412 Device Multiplexed Pins†
MULTIPLEXED PINS
NAME
NO.
DEFAULT
FUNCTION
DEFAULT
SETTING
CLKOUT4/GP0[1]
D6
CLKOUT4
GP1EN = 0 (disabled)
CLKOUT6/GP0[2]
C6
CLKOUT6
GP2EN = 0 (disabled)
DESCRIPTION
These pins are software-configurable. To use these pins as
GPIO pins, the GPxEN bits in the GPIO Enable Register and
the GPxDIR bits in the GPIO Direction Register must be
properly configured
configured.
GPxEN = 1:
GPx pin enabled
GPxDIR = 0:
GPx pin is an input
GPxDIR = 1:
GPx pin is an output
GP0[3]/PCIEEAI
GP0[8]/PCI66
L5
AD1
GP0[9]/PIDSEL
K3
GP0[10]/PCBE3
J2
GP0[11]/PREQ
F1
GP0[12]/PGNT
H4
GP0[13]/PINTA
G4
GP0[14]/PCLK
C1
GP0[15]/PRST
G3
XSP_CLK/MDCLK
PCIEEAI
PCI66
None
P5
To use GP0[3] as a GPIO pin, the PCI needs to be disabled
(PCI_EN = 0), the GP3EN bits in the GPIO Enable Register
and the GP3DIR bits in the GPIO Direction Register must be
properly configured.
GP3EN = 1:
GP3 pin enabled
GP3DIR = 0:
GP3 pin is an input
GP3DIR = 1:
GP3 pin is an output
GP8EN = 0 (disabled)
MAC_EN = 0 (disabled)
To use GP0[8] as a GPIO pin, the PCI needs to be disabled
(PCI_EN = 0), the GPxEN bits in the GPIO Enable Register
and the GPxDIR bits in the GPIO Direction Register must be
properly configured.
GP8EN = 1:
GP8 pin enabled
GP8DIR = 0:
GP8 pin is an input
GP8DIR = 1:
GP8 pin is an output
To use the PCI66 pin function, which changes the PCI
operating frequency selection, the PCI needs to be enabled
(PCI_EN = 1):
0 – PCI operates at 66 MHz (default).
1 – PCI operates at 33 MHz.
GPxEN
GP
EN = 0 (disabled)
(di bl d)
PCI_EN
PCI EN = 0 (disabled)†
To use GP0[15:9] as GPIO pins, the PCI needs to be disabled
(PCI EN = 0)
(PCI_EN
0), the GPxEN bits in the GPIO Enable Register
and the GPxDIR bits in the GPIO Direction Register must be
properly
y configured.
g
GPxEN = 1:
GPx pin enabled
GPxDIR = 0:
GPx pin is an input
GPxDIR = 1:
in is an out
ut
GPx pin
output
PCI_EN = 0 (disabled)†
MAC_EN
MAC EN = 0
(disabled)†
By default, no functions enabled upon reset (PCI is
disabled).
To enable the PCI peripheral, an external pullup resistor
(1 kΩ) must be provided
rovided on the PCI_EN pin
in (setting
PCI_EN = 1 at reset)
To enable the MDIO peripheral (which also enables the
EMAC peripheral), an external pullup resistor (1 kΩ) must be
provided on the MAC_EN pin (setting MAC_EN = 1 at reset)
R5
None
XSP_DO/MDIO
GP3EN = 0 (disabled)
† All other standalone PCI pins are tied-off internally (pins in Hi-Z) when the peripheral is disabled [PCI_EN = 0].
‡ For the HD[31:0]/AD[31:0] multiplexed pins pin numbers, see the Terminal Functions table.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
57
PRODUCT PREVIEW
To use the PCI auto–initialization EEPROM (PCIEEAI) the
PCI needs to be enabled (PCI_EN = 1):
0 – PCI auto-init through EEPROM disabled (default).
1 – PCI auto-init through EEPROM is enabled.
Configuration Examples
Table 2–9. C6412 Device Multiplexed Pins† (Continued)
MULTIPLEXED PINS
NAME
HAS/PPAR
DEFAULT
FUNCTION
P3
HAS
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL
P1
HCNTL1
HCNTL0/PSTOP
R3
HCNTL0
HDS1/PSERR
R2
HDS1
HDS2/PCBE1
T2
HDS2
HR/W/PCBE2
M1
HR/W
HHWIL/PTRDY
N3
HHWIL
(HPI16 only)
HINT/PFRAME
N4
HINT
HCS/PPERR
R1
HCS
HRDY/PIRDY
N1
HRDY
HD[23,15:0]/AD[23,15:0]
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NO.
HD31/AD31/MRCLK
‡
HD[23, 15:0]
G1
HD31
HD30/AD30/MCRS
H3
HD30
HD29/AD29/MRXER
G2
HD29
HD28/AD28/MRXDV
J4
HD28
HD27/AD27/MRXD3
H2
HD27
HD26/AD26/MRXD2
J3
HD26
HD25/AD25/MRXD1
J1
HD25
HD24/AD24/MRXD0
K4
HD24
HD22/AD22/MTCLK
L4
HD22
HD21/AD21/MCOL
K2
HD21
HD20/AD20/MTXEN
L3
HD20
HD19/AD19/MTXD3
L2
HD19
HD18/AD18/MTXD2
M4
HD18
HD17/AD17/MTXD1
M2
HD17
DEFAULT
SETTING
DESCRIPTION
PCI_EN = 0 ((disabled))†
By default, HPI is enabled upon reset (PCI is disabled).
T enable
bl th
i h l an external
t
l pullup
ll
i t
To
the PCI peripheral,
resistor
(1 kΩ) must be provided on the PCI_EN
PCI EN pin (setting
PCI_EN = 1 at reset).
PCI_EN = 0 (disabled)†
By default, HPI is enabled upon reset (PCI is disabled).
To enable the PCI peripheral, an external pullup resistor
(1 kΩ) must be provided on the PCI_EN pin (setting
PCI_EN = 1 at reset).
PCI EN = 0 (disabled)†
PCI_EN
MAC_EN = 0
(disabled)†
By default, HPI is enabled upon reset (PCI is disabled).
To enable the PCI peripheral
peripheral, an external pullup resistor
PCI EN pin
(1 kΩ) must be provided
rovided on the PCI_EN
in (setting
PCI_EN
_
= 1 at reset).
)
To enable the EMAC peripheral, an external pullup resistor
(1 kΩ) must be provided on the MAC
MAC_EN
EN pin (setting
MAC_EN
MAC EN = 1 at reset).
HD16/AD16/MTXD0
M3
HD16
† All other standalone PCI pins are tied-off internally (pins in Hi-Z) when the peripheral is disabled [PCI_EN = 0].
‡ For the HD[31:0]/AD[31:0] multiplexed pins pin numbers, see the Terminal Functions table.
2.6
Configuration Examples
Figure 2–6 illustrates an example of peripheral selections that are configurable on the C6412 device.
58
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Configuration Examples
64
AED[63:0]
PCI
EMIFA
AECLKIN, AARDY, AHOLD
AEA[22:3], ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0],
AECLKOUT1, AECLKOUT2,
ASDCKE, ASOE3, APDT,
AHOLDA, ABUSREQ,
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE,
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE,
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE
16
HD[15:0]
HPI
(16-Bit)
HRDY, HINT
HCNTL0, HCNTL1,
HHWIL, HAS, HR/W,
HCS, HDS1, HDS2
MTXD[3:0], MTXEN
EMAC
MDIO, MDCLK
MDIO
Clock
and
System
I2C0
TIMER2
VIC
TIMER1
CLKIN,
CLKMODE0, CLKMODE1
CLKOUT4, CLKOUT6, PLLV
PRODUCT PREVIEW
MRXD[3:0], MRXER,
MRXDV, MCOL, MCRS,
MTCLK, MRCLK
SCL0
SDA0
TINP1
VDAC/GP0[8]
TOUT1/LENDIAN
TINP0
CLKR0, FSR0, DR0,
CLKS0, DX0, FSX0,
CLKX0
McBSP0
CLKR1, FSR1, DR1,
CLKS1, DX1, FSX1,
CLKX1
McBSP1
TIMER0
TOUT0/MACEN
GP0
and
EXT_INT
GP0[15:9, 3:0]
GP0[7:4]
Shading denotes a peripheral module not available for this configuration.
PERCFG Register Value:
Extenal Pins:
0x0000 000D
PCI_EN = 0
GP0[3]/PCIEEAI = 0
HD5 = 0
TOUT0/MAC_EN = 1
Figure 2–6. Configuration Example
(2 McBSPs + EMAC + MDIO + I2C0 + EMIF + HPI + 3 Timers + VIC)
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
59
Terminal Functions
2.7
Terminal Functions
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The terminal functions table (Table 2–10) identifies the external signal names, the associated pin (ball)
numbers along with the mechanical package designator, the pin type (I, O/Z, or I/O/Z), whether the pin has
any internal pullup/pulldown resistors and a functional pin description. For more detailed information on device
configuration, peripheral selection, multiplexed/shared pins, and debugging considerations, see the Device
Configurations section of this data sheet.
60
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
CLOCK/PLL CONFIGURATION
CLKIN
AC2
I
IPD
Clock Input. This clock is the input to the on-chip PLL.
CLKOUT4/GP0[1]§
D6
I/O/Z
IPD
Clock output at 1/4 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be programmed as
a GP0 1 pin (I/O/Z).
CLKOUT6/GP0[2]§
C6
I/O/Z
IPD
Clock output at 1/6 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be programmed as
a GP0 2 pin (I/O/Z).
CLKMODE1
AE4
I
IPD
CLKMODE0
AA2
I
IPD
PLLV¶
V6
A#
TMS
E15
I
IPU
JTAG test-port mode select
TDO
B18
O/Z
IPU
JTAG test-port data out
TDI
A18
I
IPU
JTAG test-port data in
TCK
A16
I
IPU
JTAG test-port clock
TRST
D14
I
IPD
JTAG test-port reset. For IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility, see the IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
compatibility statement portion of this data sheet.
EMU11
D17
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation clock 1. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU10
C17
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation clock 0. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU9
B17
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 9. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU8
D16
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 8. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU7
A17
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 7. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU6
C16
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 6. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU5
B16
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 5. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU4
D15
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 4. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU3
C15
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 3. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU2
B15
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 2. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
Emulation pin 1||
Clock mode select
• Selects whether the CPU clock frequency = input clock frequency x1 (Bypass), x6,
or x12
x12.
For more details on the CLKMODE pins and the PLL multiply factors, see the Clock
PLL section of this data sheet.
PLL voltage supply
EMU1
C14
I/O/Z
IPU
EMU0
A15
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 0||
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
61
PRODUCT PREVIEW
JTAG EMULATION
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT PREVIEW
RESETS, INTERRUPTS, AND GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUTS
RESET
P4
I
NMI
B4
I
IPD
Nonmaskable interrupt, edge-driven (rising edge)
GP0[7]/EXT_INT7
E1
I/O/Z
IPU
GP0[6]/EXT_INT6
F2
I/O/Z
IPU
GP0[5]/EXT_INT5
F3
I/O/Z
IPU
GP0[4]/EXT_INT4
F4
I/O/Z
IPU
General-purpose input/output ((GPIO)) pins ((I/O/Z)) or external interrupts ((input
p only).
y)
Th default
The
d f l after
f reset setting
i iis GPIO enabled
bl d as iinput-only.
l
ins function as External Interru
ts [by selecting the corresponding
corres onding
• When these pins
Interrupts
interrupt enable register bit (IER.[7:4])], they are edge-driven and the polarity can
be independently selected via the External Interrupt Polarity Register bits
(EXTPOL.[3:0]).
GP0[15]/PRST§
G3
General-purpose input/output (GP0) 15 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI reset (I). No function at
default.
GP0[14]/PCLK§
GP0[13]/PINTA§
C1
GP0 14 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI clock (I). No function at default.
G4
GP0 13 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI interrupt A (O/Z). No function at default.
GP0[12]/PGNT§
GP0[11]/PREQ§
H4
GP0 12 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus grant (I). No function at default.
GP0[10]/PCBE3§
GP0[9]/PIDSEL§
J2
GP0 10 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI command/byte enable 3 (I/O/Z). No function at default.
K3
GP0 9 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI initialization device select (I). No function at default.
GP0[3]/PCIEEAI
L5
IPD
GP0 3 pin (I/O/Z) and PCI EEPROM Auto-Initialization (EEAI).
If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin must not be pulled up.
0 – PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is disabled (default).
1 – PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is enabled.
GP0[0]
M5
IPD
GP0 0 pin (I/O/Z) [default].
The general-purpose 0 pin (GP0[0]) (I/O/Z) can be programmed as GPIO 0 (input
only) [default] or as GP0[0] (output only) pin or output as a general-purpose interrupt
(GP0INT) signal (output only). This pin must remain low during device reset.
F1
Device reset
GP0 11 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus request (O/Z). No function at default.
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
AD1
I/O/Z
IPD
This pin can be programmed as a GP0 8 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI frequency selection (PCI66).
If the PCI peripheral is enabled (PCI_EN pin = 1), then:
0 – PCI operates at 66 MHz (default).
1 – PCI operates at 33 MHz.
If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin must not be pulled up.
CLKOUT6/GP0[2]§
C6
I/O/Z
IPD
Clock output at 1/6 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be programmed as
a GP0 2 pin (I/O/Z).
CLKOUT4/GP0[1]§
D6
I/O/Z
IPD
Clock output at 1/4 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be programmed as
a GP0 1 pin (I/O/Z).
GP0[8]/PCI66§
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
62
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
GDK/
GNZ
NAME
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) OR PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) OR EMAC
I
HINT/PFRAME§
N4
I/O/Z
Host interrupt from DSP to host (O) [default] or PCI frame (I/O/Z)
HCNTL1/
PDEVSEL§
P1
I/O/Z
Host control – selects between control, address, or data registers (I) [default] or PCI
device select (I/O/Z).
HCNTL0/
PSTOP§
R3
I/O/Z
Host control – selects between control, address, or data registers (I) [default] or PCI
stop (I/O/Z)
HHWIL/PTRDY§
N3
I/O/Z
Host half-word select – first or second half-word (not necessarily high or low order)
[For HPI16 bus width selection only] (I) [default] or PCI target ready (I/O/Z)
HR/W/PCBE2§
HAS/PPAR§
M1
I/O/Z
Host read or write select (I) [default] or PCI command/byte enable 2 (I/O/Z)
P3
I/O/Z
Host address strobe (I) [default] or PCI parity (I/O/Z)
HCS/PPERR§
HDS1/PSERR§
R1
I/O/Z
Host chip select (I) [default] or PCI parity error (I/O/Z)
R2
I/O/Z
Host data strobe 1 (I) [default] or PCI system error (I/O/Z)
T2
I/O/Z
Host data strobe 2 (I) [default] or PCI command/byte enable 1 (I/O/Z)
N1
I/O/Z
Host ready from DSP to host (O) [default] or PCI initiator ready (I/O/Z).
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
63
PRODUCT PREVIEW
E2
HDS2/PCBE1§
HRDY/PIRDY§
IPD
PCI enable pin. This pin and the MAC_EN pin control the selection (enable/disable) of
the HPI, EMAC, MDIO, and GP0[15:8], or PCI peripherals. The pins work in conjunction
to enable/disable these peripherals (for more details, see the Device Configurations
section of this data sheet).
PCI_EN
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT PREVIEW
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) OR PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) OR EMAC (CONTINUED)
HD31/AD31/MRCLK§
G1
HD30/AD30/MCRS§
H3
HD29/AD29/MRXER§
HD28/AD28/MRXDV§
G2
HD27/AD27/MRXD3§
HD26/AD26/MRXD2§
H2
J4
J3
HD25/AD25/MRXD1§
HD24/AD24/MRXD0§
K4
HD23/AD23§
K1
HD22/AD22/MTCLK§
HD21/AD21/MCOL§
K2
J1
L4
HD20/AD20/MTXEN§
HD19/AD19/MTXD3§
L3
HD18/AD18/MTXD2§
HD17/AD17/MTXD1§
M4
HD16/AD16/MTXD0§
HD15/AD15§
M3
HD14/AD14§
HD13/AD13§
U1
HD12/AD12§
HD11/AD11§
U2
HD10/AD10§
HD9/AD9§
V1
HD8/AD8§
HD7/AD7§
As HPI data bus
b s (PCI_EN
(PCI EN pin = 0)
• Used for transfer of data, address, and control
• Host
Host-Port
Port bus width user
user-configurable
configurable at device reset via a 10
10-kΩ
kΩ resistor pullup/
ullu /
pulldown resistor on the HD5 pin:
L2
HD5 pin
in = 0: HPI o
operates
erates as an HPI16.
(HPI bus is 16 bits wide. HD[15:0] pins
ins are used and the remaining HD[31:16] pins
ins
are reserved pins in the high-impedance state.)
M2
T3
U3
I/O/Z
HD5 pin
in = 1: HPI o
operates
erates as an HPI32.
(HPI
bus is 32 bits wide. All HD[31:0]
(
[
] pins are used for host-port operations.))
data-address
(PCI_EN
As PCI data
address bus (PCI
EN pin = 1)
• Used for transfer of data and address
U4
V3
V2
W2
HD6/AD6§
HD5/AD5§
W4
HD4/AD4§
HD3/AD3§
W3
HD2/AD2§
HD1/AD1§
Host-port data (I/O/Z) [default] or PCI data-address bus (I/O/Z) or EMAC
transmit/receive or control pins
ins
For superset devices like C6412,
the HD31/AD31
through HD16/AD16
pins can also
C
/
/
function as EMAC transmit/receive or control pins (when PCI_EN
PCI EN pin = 0; MAC_EN
MAC EN
in = 1). For more details on the EMAC pin
in functions, see the Ethernet MAC (EMAC)
pin
peripheral section of this table and for more details on how to configure
the EMAC pin,
g
i configuration
fi
ti section
ti off thi
d t sheet.
h t
see th
the d
device
this data
Y1
Y2
Y4
AA1
HD0/AD0§
Y3
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
64
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
PCBE0
V4
I/O/Z
PCI command/byte enable 0 (I/O/Z). When PCI is disabled (PCI_EN = 0), this pin is
tied-off.
GP0[15]/PRST§
G3
I/O/Z
General-purpose input/output (GP0) 15 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI reset (I). No function at
default.
XSP_CS
T4
O
IPD
PCI serial interface chip select (O). When PCI is disabled (PCI_EN = 0), this pin is
tied-off.
XSP_CLK/MDCLK§
R5
I/O/Z
IPD
PCI serial interface clock (O) [default] or MDIO serial clock input/output (I/O/Z).
XSP_DI
R4
I
IPU
PCI serial interface data in (I) [default]. In PCI mode, this pin is connected to the output
data pin of the serial PROM.
XSP_DO/MDIO§
P5
I/O/Z
IPU
PCI serial interface data out (O) [default] or MDIO serial data input/output (I/O/Z). In PCI
mode, this pin is connected to the input data pin of the serial PROM.
GP0[14]/PCLK§
GP0[13]/PINTA§
C1
GP0 14 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI clock (I). No function at default.
G4
GP0 13 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI interrupt A (O/Z). No function at default.
GP0[12]/PGNT§
GP0[11]/PREQ§
GP0[10]/PCBE3§
GP0[9]/PIDSEL§
GP0[3]/PCIEEAI
H4
F1
GP0 12 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus grant (I). No function at default.
I/O/Z
GP0 11 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus request (O/Z). No function at default.
J2
GP0 10 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI command/byte enable 3 (I/O/Z). No function at default.
K3
GP0 9 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI initialization device select (I). No function at default.
L5
IPD
GP0 3 pin (I/O/Z) and PCI EEPROM Auto-Initialization (EEAI).
If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin must not be pulled up.
0 – PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is disabled (default).
1 – PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is enabled.
IPD
This pin can be programmed as a GP0 8 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI frequency selection (PCI66).
If the PCI peripheral is enabled (PCI_EN pin = 1), then:
0 – PCI operates at 66 MHz (default).
1 – PCI operates at 33 MHz.
If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin must not be pulled up.
I/O/Z
GP0[8]/PCI66§
AD1
ACE3
L26
O/Z
IPU
ACE2
K23
O/Z
IPU
ACE1
K24
O/Z
IPU
I/O/Z
EMIFA (64-BIT) – CONTROL SIGNALS COMMON TO ALL TYPES OF MEMORY
EMIFA memory space enables
• Enabled by bits 28 through 31 of the word address
• Only one pin
in is asserted during any external data access
ACE0
K25
O/Z
IPU
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
65
PRODUCT PREVIEW
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) OR PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) OR EMAC (CONTINUED)
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA (64-BIT) – CONTROL SIGNALS COMMON TO ALL TYPES OF MEMORY (CONTINUED)
ABE7
T22
O/Z
IPU
ABE6
T23
O/Z
IPU
ABE5
R25
O/Z
IPU
ABE4
R26
O/Z
IPU
ABE3
M25
O/Z
IPU
ABE2
M26
O/Z
IPU
ABE1
L23
O/Z
IPU
ABE0
L24
O/Z
IPU
APDT
M22
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA byte-enable control
• Decoded from the low-order address bits.
bits The number of address bits or byte
enables
used depends on the width of external memory.
y
i enables
bl ffor most types off memory
• B
Byte-write
• Can be directly connected to SDRAM read and write mask signal (SDQM)
EMIFA peripheral data transfer, allows direct transfer between external peripherals
PRODUCT PREVIEW
EMIFA (64-BIT) – BUS ARBITRATIONk
AHOLDA
N22
O
IPU
EMIFA hold-request-acknowledge to the host
AHOLD
W24
I
IPU
EMIFA hold request from the host
ABUSREQ
P22
O
IPU
EMIFA bus request output
EMIFA (64-BIT) – ASYNCHRONOUS/SYNCHRONOUS MEMORY CONTROL
AECLKIN
H25
I
IPD
EMIFA external input clock. The EMIFA input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6
clock) is selected at reset via the pullup/pulldown resistors on the AEA[20:19] pins.
AECLKIN is the default for the EMIFA input clock.
AECLKOUT2
J23
O/Z
IPD
EMIFA output clock 2. Programmable to be EMIFA input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock,
or CPU/6 clock) frequency divided-by-1, -2, or -4.
AECLKOUT1
J26
O/Z
IPD
EMIFA output clock 1 [at EMIFA input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock)
frequency].
AARE/
ASDCAS/
ASADS/ASRE
J25
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA
asynchronous
memory
read-enable/SDRAM
column-address
strobe/programmable synchronous interface-address strobe or read-enable
• For programmable synchronous interface, the RENEN field in the CE Space
Secondary
Control Register (CExSEC) selects between ASADS and ASRE:
If RENEN = 0, then the ASADS/ASRE signal functions as the ASADS signal.
If RENEN = 1, then the ASADS/ASRE signal functions as the ASRE signal.
AAOE/
ASDRAS/
ASOE
J24
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA
asynchronous
memory
output-enable/SDRAM
strobe/programmable synchronous interface output-enable
AAWE/
ASDWE/
ASWE
K26
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA asynchronous memory write-enable/SDRAM write-enable/programmable
synchronous interface write-enable
ASDCKE
L25
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA SDRAM clock-enable (used for self-refresh mode). [EMIFA module only.]
• If SDRAM is not in system, ASDCKE can be used as a general-purpose output.
ASOE3
R22
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA synchronous memory output-enable for ACE3 (for glueless FIFO interface)
row-address
AARDY
L22
I
IPU
Asynchronous memory ready input
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
66
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA (64-BIT) – ADDRESS
U23
AEA21
V24
AEA20
V25
AEA19
V26
AEA18
V23
AEA17
U24
AEA16
U25
AEA15
U26
AEA14
T24
AEA13
T25
AEA12
R23
AEA11
R24
AEA10
P23
AEA9
P24
AEA8
P26
AEA7
N23
AEA6
N24
AEA5
N26
AEA4
M23
AEA3
M24
EMIFA external address (doubleword address)
•
O/Z
IPD
Also controls initialization of DSP modes at reset ((I)) via pullup/pulldown resistors
– Boot mode (AEA[22:21]):
00 – No boot (default mode)
01 – HPI/PCI boot (based on PCI_EN pin)
in)
10 – Reserved
11 – EMIFA b
boot
– EMIF clock select
– AEA[20:19]:
AEA[20 19] Clock
Cl k mode
d select
l t for
f EMIFA (AECLKIN_SEL[1:0])
(AECLKIN SEL[1 0])
00 – AECLKIN (default mode)
01 – CPU/4 Clock Rate
10 – CPU/6 Clock Rate
11 – Reserved
R
d
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AEA22
For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
EMIFA (64-BIT) – DATA
AED63
AF24
AED62
AF23
AED61
AE23
AED60
AD23
AED59
AD22
AED58
AE22
AED57
AD21
AED56
AE21
AED55
AC21
AED54
AF21
AED53
AD20
AED52
AE20
I/O/Z
IPU
EMIFA external data
AED51
AC20
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
67
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT PREVIEW
EMIFA (64-BIT) – DATA (CONTINUED)
AED50
AF20
AED49
AC19
AED48
AD19
AED47
W23
AED46
Y26
AED45
Y23
AED44
Y25
AED43
Y24
AED42
AA26
AED41
AA23
AED40
AA25
AED39
AA24
AED38
AB23
AED37
AB25
AED36
AB24
AED35
AC26
AED34
AC25
AED33
AD25
AED32
AD26
AED31
C26
AED30
C25
AED29
D26
AED28
D25
AED27
E24
AED26
E25
AED25
F24
AED24
F25
AED23
F23
AED22
F26
AED21
G24
AED20
G25
AED19
G23
AED18
G26
I/O/Z
IPU
EMIFA external data
AED17
H23
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
68
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA (64-BIT) – DATA (CONTINUED)
H24
AED15
C19
AED14
D19
AED13
A20
AED12
D20
AED11
B20
AED10
C20
AED9
A21
AED8
D21
AED7
B21
AED6
C21
I/O/Z
IPU
EMIFA external data
AED5
A23
AED4
C22
AED3
B22
AED2
B23
AED1
A24
AED0
B24
XSP_CLK/MDCLK§
R5
I/O/Z
IPD
PCI serial interface clock (O) [default] or MDIO serial clock input/output (I/O/Z).
XSP_DO/MDIO§
P5
I/O/Z
IPU
PCI serial interface data out (O) [default] or MDIO serial data input/output (I/O/Z). In PCI
mode, this pin is connected to the input data pin of the serial PROM.
MANAGEMENT DATA INPUT/OUTPUT (MDIO)
TIMER 2
–
No external pins. The timer 2 peripheral pins are not pinned out as external pins.
TIMER 1
TOUT1/LENDIAN
B5
O/Z
IPU
Timer 1 output (O/Z) or device endian mode (I).
Also controls initialization of DSP modes at reset via pullup/pulldown resistors
– Device Endian mode
0 – Big Endian
1 – Little Endian (default)
For more details on LENDIAN, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
TINP1
A5
I
IPD
Timer 1 or general-purpose input
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
69
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AED16
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
TIMER 0
TOUT0/MAC_EN
C5
O/Z
IPD
Timer 0 output (O/Z) or MAC enable select bit (I)
MAC enable pin. This pin and the MAC_EN pin control the selection (enable/disable) of
the HPI, EMAC, MDIO, and GP0[15:9], or PCI peripherals. The pins work in conjunction
to enable/disable these peripherals (for more details, see the Device Configurations
section of this data sheet).
For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
TINP0
A4
I
IPD
Timer 0 or general-purpose input
INTER-INTEGRATED CIRCUIT 0 (I2C0)
SCL0
E4
I/O/Z
—
I2C0 clock.
SDA0
D3
I/O/Z
—
I2C0 data.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 1 (McBSP1)
CLKR1
AD8
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP1 receive clock (I/O/Z)
FSR1
AC7
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP1 receive frame sync (I/O/Z)
DR1
AD7
I
IPD
McBSP1 receive data (I)
CLKS1
AE7
I
IPD
McBSP1 external clock source (I) (as opposed to internal)
DX1
AC6
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP1 transmit data (O/Z)
FSX1
AD6
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP1 transmit frame sync (I/O/Z)
CLKX1
AE6
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP1 transmit clock (I/O/Z)
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 0 (McBSP0)
CLKR0
AE15
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP0 receive clock (I/O/Z)
FSR0
AB16
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP0 receive frame sync (I/O/Z)
DR0
AC16
I
IPU
McBSP0 receive data (I)
CLKS0
AD16
I
IPD
McBSP0 external clock source (I) (as opposed to internal)
DX0
AE16
O/Z
IPU
McBSP0 transmit data (O/Z)
FSX0
AF16
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP0 transmit frame sync (I/O/Z)
CLKX0
AF17
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP0 transmit clock (I/O/Z)
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
70
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
G1
I
HD30/AD30/MCRS§
H3
I
HD29/AD29/MRXER§
G2
I
HD28/AD28/MRXDV§
J4
I
HD27/AD27/MRXD3§
H2
I
HD26/AD26/MRXD2§
J3
I
HD25/AD25/MRXD1§
J1
I
HD24/AD24/MRXD0§
K4
I
HD22/AD22/MTCLK§
L4
I
HD21/AD21/MCOL§
K2
I
HD20/AD20/MTXEN§
L3
O/Z
HD19/AD19/MTXD3§
L2
O/Z
HD18/AD18/MTXD2§
M4
O/Z
HD17/AD17/MTXD1§
M2
O/Z
HD16/AD16/MTXD0§
M3
O/Z
EMAC Media Inde
Independent
endent I/F (MII) data, clocks, and control pins
ins for Transmit/Receive.
MII transmit clock (MTCLK),
Transmit clock source from the attached PHY.
PHY
MII transmit data (MTXD[3:0]),
Transmit data nibble synchronous with transmit clock (MTCLK).
MII transmit enable (MTXEN),
(MTXEN)
This signal indicates a valid transmit data on the transmit data pins
ins (MTDX[3:0]).
MII collision sense ((MCOL))
A
Assertion
ti off this
thi signal
i
l during
d i half-duplex
h lf d l operation
ti indicates
i di t network
t
k collision.
lli i
During full-duplex operation, transmission of new frames will not begin if this pin is
asserted.
MII carrier sense (MCRS)
Indicates a frame carrier signal is being received.
received
MII receive data (MRXD[3:0]),
Receive data nibble synchronous with receive clock (MRCLK).
MII receive clock (MRCLK)
(MRCLK),
Receive clock source from the attached PHY.
MII receive data valid (MRXDV),
(MRDX[3:0])
This signal indicates a valid data nibble on the receive data pins (MRDX[3:0]).
and MII receive error (MRXER),
Indicates reception of a coding error on the receive data.
RESERVED FOR TEST
RSV
H7
Reserved. This pin must be connected directly to CVDD for proper device operation.
R6
Reserved. This pin must be connected directly to DVDD for proper device operation.
A7
A9
A10
RSV
A11
Reserved This pin must be connected directly to CVDD for proper device operation
Reserved.
operation.
A13
B8
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
71
PRODUCT PREVIEW
ETHERNET MAC (EMAC)
HD31/AD31/MRCLK§
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
RESERVED FOR TEST (CONTINUED)
B9
B10
B11
B12
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
PRODUCT PREVIEW
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
RSV
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power
ower or ground)
E11
E12
E13
E14
W7
AA3
AB3
AB11
AB12
AB13
AB14
AB15
AC1
AC4
AC8
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
72
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
RESERVED FOR TEST (CONTINUED)
AC9
AC10
AC11
AC12
AC13
AC14
AC15
AC17
AD3
AD5
AD9
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
RSV
AD15
Reserved (leave unconnected,
unconnected do not connect to power or ground)
AD17
AE5
AE9
AE11
AE17
AE18
AF3
AF4
AF5
AF6
AF8
AF10
AF12
AF14
AF18
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
73
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS
A2
A25
B1
B2
B14
B25
B26
C3
C24
D4
PRODUCT PREVIEW
D23
E5
E7
DVDD
S
3.3-V
3.3
V su
supply
ly voltage
E8
E10
E17
E19
E20
E22
F9
F12
F15
F18
G5
G22
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
74
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS (CONTINUED)
H5
H22
J6
J21
K5
K22
M6
M21
N2
PRODUCT PREVIEW
P25
R21
U5
U22
V21
W5
W22
DVDD
W25
S
3.3-V
3.3
V supply
su ly voltage
Y5
Y22
AA9
AA12
AA15
AA18
AB5
AB7
AB8
AB10
AB17
AB19
AB20
AB22
AC23
AD24
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
75
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS (CONTINUED)
AE1
AE2
AE13
AE25
DVDD
S
3.3-V
3.3
V su
supply
ly voltage
S
1.2-V
1
2 V supply
l voltage
lt
(-500
( 500 device)
d i )
1.4
1 4 V supply voltage (-600 device)
AE26
AF2
AF25
F6
F7
F20
PRODUCT PREVIEW
F21
G6
G7
G8
G10
G11
G13
G14
G16
CVDD
G17
G19
G20
G21
H20
K7
K20
L7
L20
M12
M14
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
76
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS (CONTINUED)
N7
N13
N15
N20
P7
P12
P14
P20
R13
R15
T7
PRODUCT PREVIEW
T20
U7
U20
W20
CVDD
Y6
S
1 2 V supply
l voltage
lt
( 500 device)
d i )
1.2-V
(-500
1.4
1 4 V supply voltage (-600 device)
Y7
Y8
Y10
Y11
Y13
Y14
Y16
Y17
Y19
Y20
Y21
AA6
AA7
AA20
AA21
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
77
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
GROUND PINS
A1
A3
A6
A8
A12
A14
A19
PRODUCT PREVIEW
A22
A26
B3
B6
B7
B13
B19
C2
C4
VSS
C13
GND
Ground pins
C18
C23
D1
D2
D5
D13
D18
D22
D24
E3
E6
E9
E16
E18
E21
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
78
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)
E23
E26
F5
F8
F10
F11
F13
F14
F16
F17
PRODUCT PREVIEW
F19
F22
G9
G12
G15
G18
H1
VSS
H6
GND
Ground pins
H21
H26
J5
J7
J20
J22
K6
K21
L1
L6
L21
M7
M13
M15
M20
N5
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
79
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)
N6
N12
N14
N21
N25
P2
P6
P13
PRODUCT PREVIEW
P15
P21
R7
R12
R14
R20
T1
T5
T6
VSS
GND
Ground pins
ins
T21
T26
U6
U21
V5
V7
V20
V22
W1
W6
W21
W26
Y9
Y12
Y15
Y18
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
80
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)
AA4
AA5
AA8
AA10
AA11
AA13
AA14
AA16
AA17
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AA19
AA22
AB1
AB2
AB4
AB6
AB9
VSS
AB18
GND
Ground pins
ins
AB21
AB26
AC3
AC5
AC18
AC22
AC24
AD2
AD4
AD18
AE3
AE8
AE10
AE12
AE14
AE19
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
81
Terminal Functions
Table 2–10. Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
GDK/
GNZ
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)
AE24
AF1
AF7
AF9
AF11
VSS
AF13
GND
Ground pins
AF15
AF19
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AF22
AF26
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
|| The EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up with 30-kΩ resistors; therefore, for emulation and normal operation, no external
pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However, for boundary scan operation, pull down the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ
resistor.
82
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Development Support
2.8
Development Support
TI offers an extensive line of development tools for the TMS320C6000 DSP platform, including
tools to evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm
implementations, and fully integrate and debug software and hardware modules.
The following products support development of C6000 DSP-based applications:
Software Development Tools:
Code Composer Studio Integrated Development Environment (IDE): including Editor
C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools
Scalable, Real-Time Foundation Software (DSP/BIOS), which provides the basic run-time
target software needed to support any DSP application.
For a complete listing of development-support tools for the TMS320C6000 DSP platform, visit
the Texas Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource
locator (URL). For information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office
or authorized distributor.
Code Composer Studio, DSP/BIOS, XDS, and TMS320 are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
83
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Hardware Development Tools:
Extended Development System (XDS) Emulator (supports C6000 DSP multiprocessor
system debug)
EVM (Evaluation Module)
Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature
2.9
Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part
numbers of all TMS320 DSP devices and support tools. Each TMS320 DSP commercial
family member has one of three prefixes: TMX, TMP, or TMS. Texas Instruments recommends
two of three possible prefix designators for support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes
represent evolutionary stages of product development from engineering prototypes
(TMX/TMDX) through fully qualified production devices/tools (TMS/TMDS).
Device development evolutionary flow:
TMX
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device’s electrical specifications
TMP
Final silicon die that conforms to the device’s electrical specifications but has not completed quality
and reliability verification
TMS
Fully qualified production device
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
TMDX Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal qualification
testing.
TMDS Fully qualified development-support product
TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped with appropriate
disclaimers describing their limitations and intended uses. Experimental devices (TMX) may not
be representative of a final product and Texas Instruments reserves the right to change or
discontinue these products without notice.
TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the
quality and reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI’s standard warranty applies.
Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the
standard production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in
any production system because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only
qualified production devices are to be used.
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates
the package type (for example, GDK), the temperature range (for example, blank is the default
commercial temperature range), and the device speed range in megahertz (for example, -600 is
600 MHz). Figure 2–7 provides a legend for reading the complete device name for any
TMS320C6000 DSP platform member.
TMS320 is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
84
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature
TMX 320 C6412 GDK
PREFIX
TMX = Experimental device
TMP = Prototype device
TMS = Qualified device
SMX= Experimental device, MIL
SMJ = MIL-PRF-38535, QML
SM = High Rel (non-38535)
DEVICE FAMILY
320 = TMS320t DSP family
( )
600
DEVICE SPEED RANGE
500 (500-MHz CPU, 100-MHz EMIF, 33-MHz PCI)
600 (600-MHz CPU, 133-MHz EMIF, 66-MHz PCI)
TEMPERATURE RANGE (DEFAULT: 0°C TO 90°C)†
Blank = 0°C to 90°C, commercial temperature
A
= –40°C to 105°C, extended temperature
PACKAGE TYPE‡
GDK = 548-pin plastic BGA
GNZ = 548-pin plastic BGA
DEVICE
C64x DSP:
6412
PRODUCT PREVIEW
† For more details, see the recommended operating conditions portion of this data sheet.
‡ BGA = Ball Grid Array
Figure 2–7. TMS320C64x DSP Device Nomenclature (Including the TMS320C6412 Device)
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
85
Documentation Support
2.10 Documentation Support
Extensive documentation supports all TMS320 DSP family generations of devices from
product announcement through applications development. The types of documentation available
include: data sheets, such as this document, with design specifications; complete user’s
reference guides for all devices and tools; technical briefs; development-support tools; on-line
help; and hardware and software applications. The following is a brief, descriptive list of support
documentation specific to the C6000 DSP devices:
The TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189)
describes the C6000 DSP CPU (core) architecture, instruction set, pipeline, and associated
interrupts.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The TMS320C6000 Peripherals Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190) describes the
functionality of the peripherals available on the C6000 DSP platform of devices, such as the
64-/32-/16-bit external memory interfaces (EMIFs), enhanced direct-memory-access (EDMA)
controller, multichannel buffered serial ports (McBSPs), 32-/16-bit host-port interfaces (HPIs), a
peripheral component interconnect (PCI), clocking and phase-locked loop (PLL);
general-purpose timers, general-purpose input/output port (GP0), and power-down modes. This
guide also includes information on internal data and program memories.
The TMS320C64x Technical Overview (literature number SPRU395) gives an introduction to the
C64x digital signal processor, and discusses the application areas that are enhanced by the
C64x DSP VelociTI.2 VLIW architecture.
TMS320C6000 DSP Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Module Peripheral Reference Guide (literature
number SPRU175) describes the functionality of the I2C peripheral.
TMS320C6000 DSP Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC)/ Management Data
Input/Output (MDIO) Module Reference Guide (literature number SPRU628) describes the
functionality of the EMAC and MDIO peripherals.
The TMS320C6412 Digital Signal Processor Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ199)
describes the known exceptions to the functional specifications for particular silicon revisions of
the TMS320C6412 device.
The Using IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839)
describes how to properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system.
The tools support documentation is electronically available within the Code Composer Studio
Integrated Development Environment (IDE). For a complete listing of C6000 DSP latest
documentation, visit the Texas Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com
uniform resource locator (URL).
86
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Clock PLL
2.11 Clock PLL
Most of the internal C64x DSP clocks are generated from a single source through the CLKIN
pin. This source clock either drives the PLL, which multiplies the source clock frequency to
generate the internal CPU clock, or bypasses the PLL to become the internal CPU clock.
To use the PLL to generate the CPU clock, the external PLL filter circuit must be properly
designed. Figure 2–8 shows the external PLL circuitry for either x1 (PLL bypass) or other PLL
multiply modes.
To minimize the clock jitter, a single clean power supply should power both the C64x DSP
device and the external clock oscillator circuit. The minimum CLKIN rise and fall times should
also be observed. For the input clock timing requirements, see the input and output clocks
electricals section.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Rise/fall times, duty cycles (high/low pulse durations), and the load capacitance of the external
clock source must meet the DSP requirements in this data sheet (see the electrical
characteristics over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating case temperature
table and the input and output clocks electricals section).
87
Clock PLL
3.3 V
CPU Clock
EMI
filter
C1
C2
10 µF
0.1 µF
/2
Peripheral Bus, EDMA
Clock, L2 Clock
/8
Timer Internal Clock
PLLV
CLKMODE0
CLKMODE1
PLLMULT
/4
CLKOUT4, Peripheral Clock,
McBSP Internal Clock
/6
CLKOUT6
PLL
x6, x12
PLLCLK
CLKIN
1
00 01 10
/4
PRODUCT PREVIEW
0
/2
ECLKIN
AEA[20:19]
Internal to C6412
(For the PLL Options, CLKMODE Pins Setup, and
PLL Clock Frequency Ranges, see Table 9.)
EMIF
00 01 10
ECLKOUT1
ECLKOUT2
EK2RATE
(GBLCTL.[19,18])
NOTES: A. Place all PLL external components (C1, C2, and the EMI Filter) as close to the C6000 DSP device as possible. For the best
performance, TI recommends that all the PLL external components be on a single side of the board without jumpers, switches, or
components other than the ones shown.
B. For reduced PLL jitter, maximize the spacing between switching signals and the PLL external components (C1, C2, and the EMI
Filter).
C. The 3.3-V supply for the EMI filter must be from the same 3.3-V power plane supplying the I/O voltage, DVDD.
D. EMI filter manufacturer TDK part number ACF451832-333, -223, -153, -103. Panasonic part number EXCCET103U.
Figure 2–8. External PLL Circuitry for Either PLL Multiply Modes or x1 (Bypass) Mode
88
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Clock PLL
Table 2–11. TMS320C6412 PLL Multiply Factor Options, Clock Frequency Ranges,
and Typical Lock Time†‡
GDK PACKAGE – 23 x 23 mm BGA,
GNZ PACKAGE – 27 x 27 mm BGA
CLKMODE1 CLKMODE0
CLKMODE
(PLL MULTIPLY
FACTORS)
CLKIN
RANGE
(MHz)
CPU CLOCK
FREQUENCY
RANGE (MHz)
CLKOUT4
RANGE (MHz)
CLKOUT6
RANGE (MHz)
TYPICAL
LOCK TIME
(µs)§
N/A
0
0
Bypass (x1)
30–75
30–75
7.5–18.8
5–12.5
0
1
x6
30–75
180–450
45–112.5
30–75
1
0
x12
30–50
360–600
90–150
60–100
75
PRODUCT PREVIEW
1
1
Reserved
–
–
–
–
–
† These clock frequency range values are applicable to a C6412–600 speed device. For –500 device speed values, see the CLKIN timing
requirements table for the specific device speed.
‡ Use external pullup resistors on the CLKMODE pins (CLKMODE1 and CLKMODE0) to set the C6412 device to one of the valid PLL multiply clock
modes (x6 or x12). With internal pulldown resistors on the CLKMODE pins (CLKMODE1, CLKMODE0), the default clock mode is x1 (bypass).
§ Under some operating conditions, the maximum PLL lock time may vary by as much as 150% from the specified typical value. For example, if
the typical lock time is specified as 100 µs, the maximum value may be as long as 250 µs.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
89
I2C
2.12 I2C
The I2C module on the TMS320C6412 may be used by the DSP to control local peripherals ICs
(DACs, ADCs, etc.) while the other may be used to communicate with other controllers in a
system or to implement a user interface.
The I2C port supports:
•
Compatible with Philips I2C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000)
•
Fast Mode up to 400 Kbps (no fail-safe I/O buffers)
•
Noise Filter to Remove Noise 50 ns or less
•
Seven- and Ten-Bit Device Addressing Modes
•
Master (Transmit/Receive) and Slave (Transmit/Receive) Functionality
•
Events: DMA, Interrupt, or Polling
•
Slew-Rate Limited Open-Drain Output Buffers
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Figure 2–9 is a block diagram of the I2C0 module.
I2C0 Module
Clock
Prescale
Peripheral Clock
(CPU/4)
I2CPSCx
SCL
Noise
Filter
I2C
Clock
Bit Clock
Generator
Control
I2CCLKHx
I2COARx
Own
Address
I2CSARx
Slave
Address
I2CMDRx
Mode
I2CCNTx
Data
Count
I2CCLKLx
Transmit
I2CXSRx
Transmit
Shift
I2CDXRx
Transmit
Buffer
Interrupt/DMA
SDA
I2C Data
Noise
Filter
Receive
I2CIERx
Interrupt
Enable
I2CDRRx
Receive
Buffer
I2CSTRx
Interrupt
Status
I2CRSRx
Receive
Shift
I2CISRCx
Interrupt
Source
NOTE A: Shading denotes control/status registers.
Figure 2–9. I2C0 Module Block Diagram
90
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
PCI
2.13 PCI
On the C6412 device, the PCI interface is multiplexed with the 32-bit Host Port Interface (HPI),
or with a combination of 16-bit HPI and EMAC/MDIO. This provides the following flexibility
options to the user:
•
•
•
32-bit 66 MHz PCI bus
32-bit HPI
Combination of 16-bit HPI and EMAC/MDIO
The PCI port for the TMS320C6000 supports connection of the DSP to a PCI host via the
integrated PCI master/slave bus interface. For the C64x devices, like the C6412, the PCI port
interfaces to the DSP via the EDMA internal address generation hardware. This architecture
allows for both PCI Master and Slave transactions, while keeping the EDMA channel resources
available for other applications.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
For more details on the PCI port peripheral module, see the “PCI” chapter of the TMS320C6000
Peripherals Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190).
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
91
EMAC
2.14 EMAC
The ethernet media access controller (EMAC) provides an efficient interface between the C6412
DSP core processor and the network. The C6412 EMAC support both 10Base-T and
100Base-TX, or 10 Mbits/second (Mbps) and 100 Mbps in either half- or full-duplex, with
hardware flow control and quality of service (QOS) support. The C6412 EMAC makes use of a
custom interface to the DSP core that allows efficient data transmission and reception.
The EMAC controls the flow of packet data from the DSP to the PHY. The MDIO module
controls PHY configuration and status monitoring.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Both the EMAC and the MDIO modules interface to the DSP through a custom interface that
allows efficient data transmission and reception. This custom interface is referred to as the
EMAC control module, and is considered integral to the EMAC/MDIO peripheral. The control
module is also used to control device reset, interrupts, and system priority.
92
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
MDIO
2.15 MDIO
The management data input/output (MDIO) module continuously polls all 32 MDIO addresses in
order to enumerate all PHY devices in the system.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The management data input/output (MDIO) module implements the 802.3 serial management
interface to interrogate and control Ethernet PHY(s) using a shared two-wire bus. Host software
uses the MDIO module to configure the auto-negotiation parameters of each PHY attached to
the EMAC, retrieve the negotiation results, and configure required parameters in the EMAC
module for correct operation. The module is designed to allow almost transparent operation of
the MDIO interface, with very little maintenance from the core processor.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
93
Power-Supply Sequencing
2.16 Power-Supply Sequencing
TI DSPs do not require specific power sequencing between the core supply and the I/O supply.
However, systems should be designed to ensure that neither supply is powered up for extended
periods of time
(>1 second) if the other supply is below the proper operating voltage.
2.16.1
Power-Supply Design Considerations
A dual-power supply with simultaneous sequencing can be used to eliminate the delay between
core and I/O power up. A Schottky diode can also be used to tie the core rail to the I/O rail (see
Figure 2–10).
I/O Supply
DVDD
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Schottky
Diode
C6000
DSP
Core Supply
CVDD
VSS
GND
Figure 2–10. Schottky Diode Diagram
Core and I/O supply voltage regulators should be located close to the DSP (or DSP array) to
minimize inductance and resistance in the power delivery path. Additionally, when designing for
high-performance applications utilizing the C6000 platform of DSPs, the PC board should
include separate power planes for core, I/O, and ground, all bypassed with high-quality
low-ESL/ESR capacitors.
TI DSPs do not require specific power sequencing between the core supply and the I/O supply.
However, systems should be designed to ensure that neither supply is powered up for extended
periods of time if the other supply is below the proper operating voltage.
2.17 Power-Supply Decoupling
In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place as many capacitors
(caps) as possible close to the DSP. Assuming 0603 caps, the user should be able to fit a total
of 60 caps, 30 for the core supply and 30 for the I/O supply. These caps need to be close to the
DSP, no more than 1.25 cm maximum distance to be effective. Physically smaller caps are
better, such as 0402, but need to be evaluated from a yield/manufacturing point-of-view.
Parasitic inductance limits the effectiveness of the decoupling capacitors, therefore physically
smaller capacitors should be used while maintaining the largest available capacitance value. As
with the selection of any component, verification of capacitor availability over the product’s
production lifetime should be considered.
94
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Power-Down Operation
2.18 Power-Down Operation
The C6412 device can be powered down in three ways:
•
•
•
Power-down due to pin configuration
Power-down due to software configuration – relates to the default state of the peripheral configuration bits
in the PERCFG register.
Power-down during run-time via software configuration
On the C6412 device, the HPI, PCI, and EMAC and MDIO peripherals are controlled (selected)
at the pin level during chip reset (e.g., PCI_EN, HD5, and MAC_EN pins).
The McBSP0, McBSP1, and I2C0 peripheral functions are selected via the peripheral
configuration (PERCFG) register bits.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
For more detailed information on the peripheral configuration pins and the PERCFG register
bits, see the Device Configurations section of this document.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
95
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Compatibility Statement
2.19 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Compatibility Statement
The TMS320C6412 DSP requires that both TRST and RESET be asserted upon power up to be
properly initialized. While RESET initializes the DSP core, TRST initializes the DSP’s emulation
logic. Both resets are required for proper operation.
While both TRST and RESET need to be asserted upon power up, only RESET needs to be
released for the DSP to boot properly. TRST may be asserted indefinitely for normal operation,
keeping the JTAG port interface and DSP’s emulation logic in the reset state.
TRST only needs to be released when it is necessary to use a JTAG controller to debug the
DSP or exercise the DSP’s boundary scan functionality.
For maximum reliability, the TMS320C6412 DSP includes an internal pulldown (IPD) on the
TRST pin to ensure that TRST will always be asserted upon power up and the DSP’s internal
emulation logic will always be properly initialized.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
JTAG controllers from Texas Instruments actively drive TRST high. However, some third-party
JTAG controllers may not drive TRST high but expect the use of a pullup resistor on TRST.
When using this type of JTAG controller, assert TRST to intialize the DSP after powerup and
externally drive TRST high before attempting any emulation or boundary scan operations.
Following the release of RESET, the low-to-high transition of TRST must be “seen” to latch the
state of EMU1 and EMU0. The EMU[1:0] pins configure the device for either Boundary Scan
mode or Emulation mode. For more detailed information, see the terminal functions section of
this data sheet.
2.20 EMIF Device Speed
The rated EMIF speed of these devices only applies to the SDRAM interface when in a system
that meets the following requirements:
•
•
•
•
•
1 bank (maximum of 2 chips) of SDRAM connected to EMIF
up to 1 bank of buffers connected to EMIF
EMIF trace lengths between 1 and 3 inches
183-MHz SDRAM for 133-MHz operation
143-MHz SDRAM for 100-MHz operation
Other configurations may be possible, but timing analysis must be done to verify all AC timings
are met. Verification of AC timings is mandatory when using configurations other than those
specified above. TI recommends utilizing I/O buffer information specification (IBIS) to analyze all
AC timings.
To properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using
IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839).
To maintain signal integrity, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output
signal lines (see the Terminal Functions table for the EMIF output signals).
96
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Bootmode
2.21 Bootmode
The C6412 device resets using the active-low signal RESET. While RESET is low, the device is
held in reset and is initialized to the prescribed reset state. Refer to reset timing for reset timing
characteristics and states of device pins during reset. The release of RESET starts the
processor running with the prescribed device configuration and boot mode.
The C6412 has three types of boot modes:
Host boot
If host boot is selected, upon release of RESET, the CPU is internally “stalled” while the remainder of the
device is released. During this period, an external host can initialize the CPU’s memory space as
necessary through the host interface, including internal configuration registers, such as those that control
the EMIF or other peripherals. For the C6412 device, the HPI peripheral is used for host boot if PCI_EN = 0,
and the PCI peripheral is used if PCI_EN = 1. Once the host is finished with all necessary initialization, it
must set the DSPINT bit in the HPIC register to complete the boot process. This transition causes the boot
configuration logic to bring the CPU out of the “stalled” state. The CPU then begins execution from address
0. The DSPINT condition is not latched by the CPU, because it occurs while the CPU is still internally
“stalled”. Also, DSPINT brings the CPU out of the “stalled” state only if the host boot process is selected. All
memory may be written to and read by the host. This allows for the host to verify what it sends to the DSP if
required. After the CPU is out of the “stalled” state, the CPU needs to clear the DSPINT, otherwise, no more
DSPINTs can be received.
•
EMIF boot (using default ROM timings)
Upon the release of RESET, the 1K-Byte ROM code located in the beginning of CE1 is copied to address 0
by the EDMA using the default ROM timings, while the CPU is internally “stalled”. The data should be
stored in the endian format that the system is using. In this case, the EMIF automatically assembles
consecutive 8-bit bytes to form the 32-bit instruction words to be copied. The transfer is automatically done
by the EDMA as a single-frame block transfer from the ROM to address 0. After completion of the block
transfer, the CPU is released from the “stalled” state and starts running from address 0.
•
No boot
With no boot, the CPU begins direct execution from the memory located at address 0. If SDRAM is used in
the system, the CPU is internally “stalled” until the SDRAM initialization is complete. Note: operation is
undefined if invalid code is located at address 0.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
97
PRODUCT PREVIEW
•
Electrical Specifications
3
Electrical Specifications
3.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case Temperature Range (Unless
Otherwise Noted)†
Supply voltage ranges:
CVDD (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – 0.3 V to 2.3 V
DVDD (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.3 V to 4 V
Input voltage ranges:
(except PCI), VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.3 V to 4 V
(PCI), VIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.5 V to DVDD + 0.5 V
Output voltage ranges: (except PCI), VO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.3 V to 4 V
(PCI), VOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.5 V to DVDD + 0.5 V
Operating case temperature ranges, TC: (default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0_C to 90_C
Storage temperature range, Tstg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –65_C to 150_C
PRODUCT PREVIEW
† Stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and
functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not
implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
NOTE 1: All voltage values are with respect to VSS.
3.2
Recommended Operating Conditions
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
1.14
1.2
1.26
V
CVDD
Supply voltage, Core (-500 device)‡
Supply voltage, Core (-600 device)‡
1.36
1.4
1.44
V
DVDD
Supply voltage, I/O
3.14
3.3
3.46
V
VSS
VIH
Supply ground
0
0
0
V
High-level input voltage (except PCI)
2
VIL
VIP
Low-level input voltage (except PCI)
VIHP
VILP
High-level input voltage (PCI)
CVDD
Input voltage (PCI)
Low-level input voltage (PCI)
V
0.8
V
–0.5
DVDD + 0.5
V
0.5DVDD
–0.5
DVDD + 0.5
V
0.3DVDD
90
V
TC
Operating case temperature
0
_C
‡ Future variants of the C64x DSPs may operate at voltages ranging from 1.2 V to 1.4 V to provide a range of system power/performance options.
TI highly recommends that users design-in a supply that can handle multiple voltages within this range (i.e., 1.2 V, 1.25 V, 1.3 V, 1.35 V, 1.4 V
with ± 3% tolerances) by implementing simple board changes such as reference resistor values or input pin configuration modifications. Examples
of such supplies include the PT4660, PT5500, PT5520, PT6440, and PT6930 series from Power Trends, a subsidiary of Texas Instruments. Not
incorporating a flexible supply may limit the system’s ability to easily adapt to future versions of C64x devices.
98
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Electrical Specifications
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and
Operating Case Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted)
TEST CONDITIONS†
PARAMETER
VOH
VOHP
High-level output voltage (except PCI)
DVDD = MIN,
High-level output voltage (PCI)
VOL
VOLP
Low-level output voltage (except PCI)
IOHP = –0.5 mA,
DVDD = MIN,
II
IIP
IOH
Low-level output voltage (PCI)
Input current (except PCI)
IOH = MAX
DVDD = 3.3 V
MIN
TYP
2.4
UNIT
V
0.9DVDD¶
V
IOL = MAX
DVDD = 3.3 V
0.4
0.1DVDD¶
IOLP = 1.5 mA,
VI = VSS to DVDD no opposing internal
resistor
V
V
±10
uA
VI = VSS to DVDD opposing internal
pullup resistor‡
50
100
150
uA
VI = VSS to DVDD opposing internal
pulldown resistor‡
–150
–100
–50
uA
Input leakage current (PCI)§
0 < VIP < DVDD = 3.3 V
±10
uA
EMIF, CLKOUT4, CLKOUT6, EMUx
–16
mA
High-level output current
Timer, TDO, GPIO (Excluding GP[15:9,
2, 1]), McBSP
–8
mA
–0.5¶
mA
16
mA
8
mA
PCI/HPI
1.5¶
mA
VO = DVDD or 0 V
CVDD = 1.4 V, CPU clock = 600 MHz
±10
uA
TBD
mA
CVDD = 1.2 V, CPU clock = 500 MHz
TBD
mA
DVDD = 3.3 V, CPU clock = 600 MHz
TBD
mA
PCI/HPI
EMIF, CLKOUT4, CLKOUT6, EMUx
IOL
MAX
Low-level output current
IOZ
Off-state output current
ICDD
Core supply current#
IDDD
Ci
I/O supply current#
Input capacitance
Timer, TDO, GPIO (Excluding GP[15:9,
2, 1]), McBSP
10
pF
Co
Output capacitance
10
pF
† For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or NOM, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.
‡ Applies only to pins with an internal pullup (IPU) or pulldown (IPD) resistor.
§ PCI input leakage currents include Hi-Z output leakage for all bidirectional buffers with 3-state outputs.
¶ These rated numbers are from the PCI specification version 2.3. The DC specification and AC specification are defined in Tables 4-3 and 4-4,
respectively.
# Measured with average activity (50% high/50% low power). The actual current draw is highly application-dependent. For more details on core
and I/O activity, refer to the TMS320C6414/15/16 Power Consumption Summary application report (literature number SPRA811).
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
99
PRODUCT PREVIEW
3.3
Electrical Specifications
3.4
Parameter Information
Tester Pin Electronics
42 Ω
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
Output
Under
Test
3.5 nH
Transmission Line
Z0 = 50 Ω
(see note)
4.0 pF
Device Pin
(see note)
1.85 pF
NOTE: The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects
must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to produce the desired transmission line effect.
The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from
the data sheet timings.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin.
Figure 3–1. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements
The load capacitance value stated is only for characterization and measurement of AC timing
signals. This load capacitance value does not indicate the maximum load the device is capable of
driving.
3.4.1 Signal Transition Levels
All input and output timing parameters are referenced to 1.5 V for both “0” and “1” logic levels.
Vref = 1.5 V
Figure 3–2. Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to VIL MAX and VIH MIN for input
clocks, VOL MAX and VOH MIN for output clocks, VILP MAX and VIHP MIN for PCI input clocks, and
VOLP MAX and VOHP MIN for PCI output clocks.
Vref = VIH MIN (or VOH MIN or
VIHP MIN or VOHP MIN)
Vref = VIL MAX (or VOL MAX or
VILP MAX or VOLP MAX)
Figure 3–3. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels
3.4.2 Signal Transition Rates
All timings are tested with an input edge rate of 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns).
100
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Electrical Specifications
3.5
Timing Parameters and Board Routing Analysis
The timing parameter values specified in this data sheet do not include delays by board routings.
As a good board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values
may be adjusted by increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O
buffer information specification (IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. If
needed, external logic hardware such as buffers may be used to compensate any timing
differences.
For inputs, timing is most impacted by the round-trip propagation delay from the DSP to the
external device and from the external device to the DSP. This round-trip delay tends to negatively
impact the input setup time margin, but also tends to improve the input hold time margins (see
Table 3–1 and Figure 3–4).
Figure 3–4 represents a general transfer between the DSP and an external device. The figure
also represents board route delays and how they are perceived by the DSP and the external
device.
Table 3–1. Board-Level Timing Example (see Figure 3–4)
DESCRIPTION
1
Clock route delay
2
Minimum DSP hold time
3
Minimum DSP setup time
4
External device hold time requirement
5
External device setup time requirement
6
Control signal route delay
7
External device hold time
8
External device access time
9
DSP hold time requirement
10
DSP setup time requirement
11
Data route delay
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NO.
ECLKOUTx
(Output from DSP)
1
ECLKOUTx
(Input to External Device)
Control Signals†
(Output from DSP)
2
3
4
5
Control Signals
(Input to External Device)
6
7
Data Signals‡
(Output from External Device)
8
10
Data Signals‡
(Input to DSP)
9
11
† Control signals include data for Writes.
‡ Data signals are generated during Reads from an external device.
Figure 3–4. Board-Level Input/Output Timings
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
101
Input and Output Clocks
4
Input and Output Clocks
Table 4–1. Timing Requirements for CLKIN for –500 Devices†‡§ (see Figure 4–1)
–500
PLL MODE x12
NO.
1
2
3
4
MIN
MAX
24
33.3
tc(CLKIN)
tw(CLKINH)
Cycle time, CLKIN
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
0.4C
tw(CLKINL)
tt(CLKIN)
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
0.4C
PLL MODE x6
x1 (BYPASS)
MIN
MAX
13.3
33.3
0.4C
MAX
13.3
33.3
0.45C
0.4C
Transition time, CLKIN
UNIT
MIN
ns
0.45C
5
ns
ns
5
1
ns
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
‡ For more details on the PLL multiplier factors (x6, x12), see the Clock PLL section of this data sheet.
§ C = CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when CLKIN frequency is 50 MHz, use C = 20 ns.
Table 4–2. Timing Requirements for CLKIN for –600 Devices†‡§ (see Figure 4–1)
–600
PLL MODE x12
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NO.
1
2
3
4
PLL MODE x6
x1 (BYPASS)
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
20
33.3
13.3
33.3
13.3
33.3
tc(CLKIN)
tw(CLKINH)
Cycle time, CLKIN
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
0.4C
0.4C
0.45C
tw(CLKINL)
tt(CLKIN)
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
0.4C
0.4C
0.45C
Transition time, CLKIN
5
5
ns
ns
ns
1
ns
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
‡ For more details on the PLL multiplier factors (x6, x12), see the Clock PLL section of this data sheet.
§ C = CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when CLKIN frequency is 50 MHz, use C = 20 ns.
1
4
2
CLKIN
3
4
Figure 4–1. CLKIN Timing
102
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Input and Output Clocks
Table 4–3. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT4†‡§
(see Figure 4–2)
–500
–600
NO
NO.
PARAMETER
CLKMODE = x1, x6, x12
MIN
1
2
3
4
UNIT
MAX
tc(CKO4)
tw(CKO4H)
Cycle time, CLKOUT4
4P – 0.7
4P + 0.7
ns
Pulse duration, CLKOUT4 high
2P – 0.7
2P + 0.7
ns
tw(CKO4L)
tt(CKO4)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT4 low
2P – 0.7
2P + 0.7
ns
1
ns
Transition time, CLKOUT4
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
‡ PH is the high period of CLKIN in ns and PL is the low period of CLKIN in ns.
§ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns)
1
CLKOUT4
3
4
Figure 4–2. CLKOUT4 Timing
Table 4–4. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT6†‡§
(see Figure 4–3)
–500
–600
NO
NO.
PARAMETER
CLKMODE = x1, x6, x12
MIN
1
2
3
4
UNIT
MAX
tc(CKO6)
tw(CKO6H)
Cycle time, CLKOUT6
6P – 0.7
6P + 0.7
ns
Pulse duration, CLKOUT6 high
3P – 0.7
3P + 0.7
ns
tw(CKO6L)
tt(CKO6)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT6 low
3P – 0.7
3P + 0.7
ns
1
ns
Transition time, CLKOUT6
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
‡ PH is the high period of CLKIN in ns and PL is the low period of CLKIN in ns.
§ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns)
1
4
2
CLKOUT6
3
4
Figure 4–3. CLKOUT6 Timing
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
103
PRODUCT PREVIEW
4
2
Input and Output Clocks
Table 4–5. Timing Requirements for AECLKIN for EMIFA†‡§ (see Figure 4–4)
–500
–600
NO.
1
2
3
4
tc(EKI)
tw(EKIH)
Cycle time, AECLKIN
MIN
6¶
Pulse duration, AECLKIN high
3.38
tw(EKIL)
tt(EKI)
Pulse duration, AECLKIN low
3.38
Transition time, AECLKIN
UNIT
MAX
16P
ns
ns
ns
2
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
§ Minimum ECLKIN times are based on internal logic speed; the maximum useable speed of the EMIF may be lower due to AC timing requirements.
On the 600 devices, 133-MHz operation is achievable if the requirements of the EMIF Device Speed section are met. On the 500 devices,
100-MHz operation is achievable if the requirements of the EMIF Device Speed section are met.
1
4
PRODUCT PREVIEW
2
AECLKIN
3
4
Figure 4–4. ECLKIN Timing for EMIFA
Table 4–6. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for AECLKOUT1 for the
EMIFA Module§¶#|| (see Figure 4–5)
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
–500
–600
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
E – 0.7
E + 0.7
ns
tc(EKO1)
tw(EKO1H)
Cycle time, AECLKOUT1
Pulse duration, AECLKOUT1 high
EH – 0.7
EH + 0.7
ns
tw(EKO1L)
tt(EKO1)
Pulse duration, AECLKOUT1 low
EL – 0.7
EL + 0.7
ns
1
ns
td(EKIH-EKO1H)
td(EKIL-EKO1L)
Delay time, AECLKIN high to AECLKOUT1 high
1
8
ns
Delay time, AECLKIN low to AECLKOUT1 low
1
8
ns
Transition time, AECLKOUT1
¶ The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
# E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA.
|| EH is the high period of E (EMIF input clock period) in ns and EL is the low period of E (EMIF input clock period) in ns for EMIFA.
AECLKIN
6
5
1
2
3
4
4
AECLKOUT1
Figure 4–5. AECLKOUT1 Timing for EMIFA Module
104
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Input and Output Clocks
Table 4–7. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for AECLKOUT2 for the
EMIFA Module†‡ (see Figure 4–6)
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
–500
–600
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
NE – 0.7
NE + 0.7
ns
tc(EKO2)
tw(EKO2H)
Cycle time, AECLKOUT2
Pulse duration, AECLKOUT2 high
0.5NE – 0.7
0.5NE + 0.7
ns
tw(EKO2L)
tt(EKO2)
Pulse duration, AECLKOUT2 low
0.5NE – 0.7
0.5NE + 0.7
ns
1
ns
td(EKIH-EKO2H)
td(EKIH-EKO2L)
Delay time, ECLKIN high to AECLKOUT2 high
3
8
ns
Delay time, ECLKIN high to AECLKOUT2 low
3
8
ns
Transition time, AECLKOUT2
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
‡ E = the EMIF input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA.
N = the EMIF input clock divider; N = 1, 2, or 4.
5
6
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AECLKIN
1
2
3
4
4
AECLKOUT2
Figure 4–6. AECLKOUT2 Timing for the EMIFA Module
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
105
Asynchronous Memory Timing
5
Asynchronous Memory Timing
Table 5–1. Timing Requirements for Asynchronous Memory Cycles for EMIFA Module†‡
(see Figure 5–1 and Figure 5–2)
–500
–600
NO.
MIN
3
4
6
7
tsu(EDV-AREH)
th(AREH-EDV)
Setup time, AEDx valid before AARE high
tsu(ARDY-EKO1H)
th(EKO1H-ARDY)
UNIT
MAX
6.5
ns
Hold time, AEDx valid after AARE high
1
ns
Setup time, AARDY valid before AECLKOUT1 high
3
ns
Hold time, AARDY valid after AECLKOUT1 high
1
ns
† To ensure data setup time, simply program the strobe width wide enough. ARDY is internally synchronized. The ARDY signal is recognized in
the cycle for which the setup and hold time is met. To use ARDY as an asynchronous input, the pulse width of the ARDY signal should be wide
enough (e.g., pulse width = 2E) to ensure setup and hold time is met.
‡ RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters are
programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 5–2. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Asynchronous
Memory Cycles for EMIFA Module‡§¶ (see Figure 5–1 and Figure 5–2)
NO.
PARAMETER
–500
–600
MIN
1
2
5
8
9
UNIT
MAX
tosu(SELV-AREL)
toh(AREH-SELIV)
Output setup time, select signals valid to AARE low
RS * E – 1.5
ns
Output hold time, AARE high to select signals invalid
RH * E – 1.9
ns
td(EKO1H-AREV)
tosu(SELV-AWEL)
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to AARE valid
Output setup time, select signals valid to AAWE low
WS * E – 1.7
ns
toh(AWEH-SELIV)
td(EKO1H-AWEV)
Output hold time, AAWE high to select signals invalid
WH * E – 1.8
ns
1
7
ns
10
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to AAWE valid
1.3
7.1
ns
‡ RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters are
programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.
§ E = ECLKOUT1 period in ns for EMIFA
¶ Select signals for EMIFA include: ACEx, ABE[7:0], AEA[22:3], AAOE; and for EMIFA writes, include AED[63:0].
106
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Asynchronous Memory Timing
Setup = 2
Strobe = 3
Not Ready
Hold = 2
AECLKOUT1
1
2
1
2
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
BE
2
1
AEA[22:3]
Address
3
4
AED[63:0]
1
2
Read Data
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE†
5
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE†
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE†
7
7
6
6
AARDY
† AOE/SDRAS/SOE, ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE operate as AOE (identified under select signals), ARE, and AWE,
respectively, during asynchronous memory accesses.
Figure 5–1. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing for EMIFA
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
107
PRODUCT PREVIEW
5
Asynchronous Memory Timing
Setup = 2
Strobe = 3
Hold = 2
Not Ready
AECLKOUT1
9
8
ACEx
9
8
ABE[7:0]
BE
9
8
AEA[22:3]
Address
9
8
AED[63:0]
Write Data
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE†
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE†
10
PRODUCT PREVIEW
10
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE†
7
6
7
6
AARDY
† AOE/SDRAS/SOE, ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE operate as AOE (identified under select signals), ARE, and AWE,
respectively, during asynchronous memory accesses.
Figure 5–2. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing for EMIFA
108
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Programmable Synchronous Interface Timing
6
Programmable Synchronous Interface Timing
Table 6–1. Timing Requirements for Programmable Synchronous Interface Cycles for EMIFA Module†
(see Figure 6–1)
–500
NO
NO.
6
7
MIN
tsu(EDV-EKOxH)
th(EKOxH-EDV)
–600
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
Setup time, read AEDx valid before AECLKOUTx high
3.1
2
ns
Hold time, read AEDx valid after AECLKOUTx high
1.5
1.5
ns
Table 6–2. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Programmable
Synchronous Interface Cycles for EMIFA Module† (see Figure 6–1–Figure 6–3)
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
PARAMETER
–600
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
4.9
ns
td(EKOxH-CEV)
td(EKOxH-BEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ACEx valid
td(EKOxH-BEIV)
td(EKOxH-EAV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ABEx invalid
td(EKOxH-EAIV)
td(EKOxH-ADSV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AEAx invalid
1.3
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ASADS/ASRE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
td(EKOxH-OEV)
td(EKOxH-EDV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to, ASOE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
4.9
ns
td(EKOxH-EDIV)
td(EKOxH-WEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AEDx invalid
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to BEx valid
6.4
1.3
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AEAx valid
1.3
6.4
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to AEDx valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
ns
4.9
ns
ns
1.3
ns
12
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ASWE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
† The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
– Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
– Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
– ACEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ACEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, ACEx is active when ASOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
– Function of ASADS/ASRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASADS with deselect cycles
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).
– Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to AECLKOUT1 or AECLKOUT2
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
109
PRODUCT PREVIEW
–500
NO
NO.
Programmable Synchronous Interface Timing
READ latency = 2
AECLKOUTx
1
1
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
2
BE1
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
4
AEA[22:3]
EA1
5
EA3
EA2
6
AED[63:0]
EA4
7
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
8
8
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/
ASRE§
9
9
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE§
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE§
† The read latency and the length of CEx assertion are programmable via the SYNCRL and CEEXT fields, respectively, in the EMIFA CE Space
Secondary Control register (CExSEC). In this figure, SYNCRL = 2 and CEEXT = 0.
‡ The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
– Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
– Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
– ACEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ACEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, ACEx is active when ASOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
– Function of ASADS/ASRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASADS with deselect cycles
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).
– Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to AECLKOUT1 or AECLKOUT2
§ AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, and AAWE/ASDWE/AsWE operate as ASADS/ASRE, ASOE, and ASWE,
respectively, during programmable synchronous interface accesses.
Figure 6–1. Programmable Synchronous Interface Read Timing for EMIFA
(With Read Latency = 2)†‡
110
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Programmable Synchronous Interface Timing
AECLKOUTx
1
1
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
2
BE1
AEA[22:3]
4
EA1
EA2
EA3
EA4
10
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
10
AED[63:0]
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE§
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
5
11
8
8
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE§
12
12
† The write latency and the length of ACEx assertion are programmable via the SYNCWL and CEEXT fields, respectively, in the EMIFA CE Space
Secondary Control register (CExSEC). In this figure, SYNCWL = 0 and CEEXT = 0.
‡ The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
– Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
– Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
– ACEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ACEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, ACEx is active when ASOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
– Function of ASADS/ASRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASADS with deselect cycles
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).
– Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to AECLKOUT1 or AECLKOUT2
§ AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, and AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE operate as ASADS/ASRE, ASOE, and ASWE,
respectively, during programmable synchronous interface accesses.
Figure 6–2. Programmable Synchronous Interface Write Timing for EMIFA
(With Write Latency = 0)†‡§
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
111
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE§
Programmable Synchronous Interface Timing
Write
Latency =
1‡
AECLKOUTx
1
1
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
2
BE1
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
EA2
10
EA3
EA4
Q1
Q2
Q3
5
4
AEA[22:3]
EA1
10
AED[63:0]
11
Q4
8
8
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/
ASRE§
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE§
12
12
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE§
† The write latency and the length of ACEx assertion are programmable via the SYNCWL and CEEXT fields, respectively, in the EMIFA CE Space
Secondary Control register (CExSEC). In this figure, SYNCWL = 1 and CEEXT = 0.
‡ The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
– Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
– Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
– ACEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ACEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, ACEx is active when ASOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
– Function of ASADS/ASRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASADS with deselect cycles
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, ASADS/ASRE acts as ASRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).
– Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to ECLKOUT1 or ECLKOUT2
§ AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, and AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE operate as ASADS/ASRE, AsOE, and ASWE,
respectively, during programmable synchronous interface accesses.
Figure 6–3. Programmable Synchronous Interface Write Timing for EMIFA
(With Write Latency = 1)†‡
112
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Synchronous DRAM Timing
7
Synchronous DRAM Timing
Table 7–1. Timing Requirements for Synchronous DRAM Cycles for EMIFA Module (see Figure 7–1)
–500
NO
NO.
6
7
MIN
tsu(EDV-EKO1H)
th(EKO1H-EDV)
–600
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
Setup time, read AEDx valid before AECLKOUT1 high
2.1
0.6
ns
Hold time, read AEDx valid after AECLKOUT1 high
2.5
1.8
ns
Table 7–2. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Synchronous DRAM
Cycles for EMIFA Module (see Figure 7–1–Figure 7–8)
1
PARAMETER
–600
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
4.9
ns
td(EKO1H-CEV)
td(EKO1H-BEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to ACEx valid
td(EKO1H-BEIV)
td(EKO1H-EAV)
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to ABEx invalid
td(EKO1H-EAIV)
td(EKO1H-CASV)
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to AEAx invalid
1.3
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to ASDCAS valid
1.3
td(EKO1H-EDV)
td(EKO1H-EDIV)
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to AEDx valid
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to AEDx invalid
1.3
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to ASDWE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
12
td(EKO1H-WEV)
td(EKO1H-RAS)
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to ASDRAS valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
13
td(EKO1H-ACKEV)
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to ASDCKE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
14
td(EKO1H-PDTV)
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to PDT valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
April 2003 – May 2003
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to ABEx valid
6.4
1.3
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to AEAx valid
1.3
6.4
ns
4.9
1.3
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
ns
4.9
ns
4.9
ns
1.3
PRODUCT PREVIEW
–500
NO
NO.
ns
SPRS219A
113
Synchronous DRAM Timing
READ
AECLKOUT1
1
1
ACEx
2
BE1
ABE[7:0]
4
Bank
5
AEA[22:14]
4
Column
5
AEA[12:3]
4
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
5
AEA13
6
AED[63:0]
D1
7
D2
D3
D4
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE†
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/
ASRE†
8
8
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE†
14
14
PDT‡
† AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS,
respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
‡ PDT signal is only asserted when the EDMA is in PDT mode (set the PDTS bit to 1 in the EDMA options parameter RAM). For PDT read, data
is not latched into EMIF. The PDTRL field in the PDT control register (PDTCTL) configures the latency of the PDT signal with respect to the data
phase of a read transaction. The latency of the PDT signal for a read can be programmed to 0, 1, 2, or 3 by setting PDTRL to 00, 01, 10, or 11,
respectively. PDTRL equals 00 (zero latency) in Figure 7–1.
Figure 7–1. SDRAM Read Command (CAS Latency 3) for EMIFA
114
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Synchronous DRAM Timing
WRITE
AECLKOUT1
1
2
2
4
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
BE1
4
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
D2
D3
D4
5
Bank
AEA[22:14]
5
4
Column
AEA[12:3]
4
5
AEA13
9
AED[63:0]
10
9
D1
8
8
11
11
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/
ASRE†
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE†
14
14
PDT‡
† AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as AsDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS, respectively,
during SDRAM accesses.
‡ PDT signal is only asserted when the EDMA is in PDT mode (set the PDTD bit to 1 in the EDMA options parameter RAM). For PDT write, data
is not driven (in High-Z). The PDTWL field in the PDT control register (PDTCTL) configures the latency of the PDT signal with respect to the data
phase of a write transaction. The latency of the PDT signal for a write transaction can be programmed to 0, 1, 2, or 3 by setting PDTWL to 00,
01, 10, or 11, respectively. PDTWL equals 00 (zero latency) in Figure 7–2.
Figure 7–2. SDRAM Write Command for EMIFA
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
115
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE†
Synchronous DRAM Timing
ACTV
AECLKOUT1
1
1
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
4
Bank Activate
5
AEA[22:14]
4
Row Address
5
AEA[12:3]
4
Row Address
5
AEA13
AED[63:0]
12
12
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE†
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/
ASRE†
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE†
† AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS,
respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 7–3. SDRAM ACTV Command for EMIFA
DCAB
AECLKOUT1
1
1
4
5
12
12
11
11
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
AEA[22:14, 12:3]
AEA13
AED[63:0]
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE†
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/
ASRE†
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE†
† AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS,
respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 7–4. SDRAM DCAB Command for EMIFA
116
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Synchronous DRAM Timing
DEAC
AECLKOUT1
1
1
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
4
AEA[22:14]
5
Bank
AEA[12:3]
4
5
12
12
11
11
AEA13
AED[63:0]
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/
ASRE†
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE†
† AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS,
respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 7–5. SDRAM DEAC Command for EMIFA
REFR
AECLKOUT1
1
1
12
12
8
8
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
AEA[22:14, 12:3]
AEA13
AED[63:0]]
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE†
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/
ASRE†
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE†
† AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS,
respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 7–6. SDRAM REFR Command for EMIFA
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
117
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE†
Synchronous DRAM Timing
MRS
AECLKOUT1
1
1
4
MRS value
5
12
12
8
8
11
11
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
AEA[22:3]
AED[63:0]
AAOE/ASDRAS/
ASOE†
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/
ASRE†
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE†
† AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS,
respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 7–7. SDRAM MRS Command for EMIFA
≥ TRAS cycles
End Self-Refresh
Self Refresh
AECLKOUT1
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
AEA[22:14, 12:3]
AEA13
AED[63:0]
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE†
AARE/ASDCAS/
ASADS/ASRE†
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE†
13
13
ASDCKE
† AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS,
respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 7–8. SDRAM Self-Refresh Timing for EMIFA
118
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
HOLD/HOLDA Timing
8
HOLD/HOLDA Timing
Table 8–1. Timing Requirements for the HOLD/HOLDA Cycles for EMIFA Module† (see Figure 8–1)
–500
NO
NO.
MIN
3
toh(HOLDAL-HOLDL) Hold time, HOLD low after HOLDA low
† E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA.
–600
MAX
E
MIN
MAX
E
UNIT
ns
Table 8–2. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for the HOLD/HOLDA
Cycles for EMIFA Module†‡§ (see Figure 8–1)
1
2
4
5
6
7
PARAMETER
MIN
td(HOLDL-EMHZ)
td(EMHZ-HOLDAL)
Delay time, HOLD low to EMIFA Bus high impedance
td(HOLDH-EMLZ)
td(EMLZ-HOLDAH)
Delay time, HOLD high to EMIF Bus low impedance
td(HOLDL-EKOHZ)
td(HOLDH-EKOLZ)
–600
2E
MAX
¶
Delay time, EMIF Bus high impedance to HOLDA low
MIN
2E
MAX
¶
UNIT
ns
0
2E
0
2E
ns
2E
7E
2E
7E
ns
Delay time, EMIFA Bus low impedance to HOLDA high
0
2E
2E
¶
ns
2E
2E
¶
0
Delay time, HOLD low to AECLKOUTx high impedance
Delay time, HOLD high to AECLKOUTx low impedance
2E
7E
2E
7E
ns
ns
† E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA.
‡ EMIFA Bus consists of: ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0], AED[63:0], AEA[22:3], AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, and
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE , ASDCKE, ASOE3, and APDT.
§ The EKxHZ bits in the EMIF Global Control register (GBLCTL) determine the state of the ECLKOUTx signals during HOLDA. If EKxHZ = 0,
ECLKOUTx continues clocking during Hold mode. If EKxHZ = 1, ECLKOUTx goes to high impedance during Hold mode, as shown in Figure 8–1.
¶ All pending EMIF transactions are allowed to complete before HOLDA is asserted. If no bus transactions are occurring, then the minimum delay
time can be achieved. Also, bus hold can be indefinitely delayed by setting NOHOLD = 1.
External Requestor
Owns Bus
DSP Owns Bus
DSP Owns Bus
3
HOLD
2
5
HOLDA
EMIFA Bus†
1
4
C64x
C64x
AECLKOUTx
6
7
AECLKOUTx
† EMIFA Bus consists of: ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0], AED[63:0], AEA[22:3], AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, and
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, ASDCKE, ASOE3, and APDT.
Figure 8–1. HOLD/HOLDA Timing for EMIFA
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
119
PRODUCT PREVIEW
–500
NO
NO.
BUSREQ Timing
9
BUSREQ Timing
Table 9–1. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for the BUSREQ Cycles
for EMIFA Module (see Figure 9–1)
–500
NO
NO.
1
PARAMETER
td(AEKO1H-ABUSRV)
Delay time, AECLKOUT1 high to ABUSREQ valid
–600
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
0.6
7.1
1
5.5
UNIT
ns
AECLKOUT1
1
1
ABUSREQ
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Figure 9–1. BUSREQ Timing for EMIFA
120
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Reset Timing
10
Reset Timing
Table 10–1. Timing Requirements for Reset (see Figure 10–1)
–500
–600
NO.
MIN
1
16
tw(RST)
tsu(boot)
Width of the RESET pulse
Setup time, boot configuration bits valid before RESET high†
Hold time, boot configuration bits valid after RESET high†
UNIT
MAX
µs
250
4E or 4C‡
ns
th(boot)
4E or 4C‡
ns
† AEA[22:19], LEND, BOOTMODE[1:0], ECLKIN_SEL[1:0], PCIEEAI, and HD5/AD5 are the boot configuration pins during device reset.
‡ E = 1/ECLKIN clock frequency in ns. C = 1/CLKIN clock frequency in ns.
Select the MIN parameter value, whichever value is larger.
17
Table 10–2. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Reset§¶#
(see Figure 10–1)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
PARAMETER
–500
–600
UNIT
MIN
MAX
td(RSTL-ECKI)
td(RSTH-ECKI)
Delay time, RESET low to ECLKIN synchronized internally
2E
3P + 20E
ns
Delay time, RESET high to ECLKIN synchronized internally
2E
8P + 20E
ns
td(RSTL-ECKO1HZ)
td(RSTH-ECKO1V)
Delay time, RESET low to ECLKOUT1 high impedance
2E
td(RSTL-EMIFZHZ)
td(RSTH-EMIFZV)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF Z high impedance
td(RSTL-EMIFHIV)
td(RSTH-EMIFHV)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF high group invalid
td(RSTL-EMIFLIV)
td(RSTH-EMIFLV)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF low group invalid
td(RSTL-LOWIV)
td(RSTH-LOWV)
Delay time, RESET low to low group invalid
td(RSTL-ZHZ)
td(RSTH-ZV)
Delay time, RESET low to Z group high impedance
Delay time, RESET high to ECLKOUT1 valid
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF Z valid
8P + 20E
ns
2E
3P + 4E
ns
16E
8P + 20E
ns
2E
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF high group valid
ns
8P + 20E
2E
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF low group valid
0
ns
ns
11P
0
2P
ns
ns
8P + 20E
Delay time, RESET high to low group valid
Delay time, RESET high to Z group valid
ns
ns
ns
8P
ns
§ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
¶ E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA.
# EMIF Z group consists of:
AEA[22:3], AED[63:0], ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0], AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE,AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE,
and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, ASOE3, ASDCKE, and APDT.
EMIF high group consists of: AHOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is high)
EMIF low group consists of: ABUSREQ; AHOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is low)
Low group consists of:
XSP_CS, XSP_CLK/MDCLK, and XSP_DO/MDIO; all of which apply only when PCI EEPROM is enabled
(with PCI_EN = 1). Otherwise, the XSP_CLK/MDCLK and XSP_DO/MDIO pins are in the
Z group. For more details on the PCI configuration pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
Z group consists of:
HD[31:0]/AD[31:0] and the muxed EMAC output pins, XSP_CLK/MDCLK, XSP_DO/MDIO, CLKX0,
CLKX1, FSX0, FSX1, DX0, DX1, CLKR0, CLKR1, FSR0, FSR1, TOUT0, TOUT1,
GP0[8]/PCI66, GP0[7:0], GP0[10]/PCBE3, HR/W/PCBE2, HDS2/PCBE1, PCBE0, GP0[13]/PINTA,
GP0[11]/PREQ, HDS1/PSERR, HCS/PPERR, HCNTL1/PDEVSEL, HAS/PPAR, HCNTL0/PSTOP,
HHWIL/PTRDY (16-bit HPI mode only), HRDY/PIRDY, and HINT/PFRAME.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
121
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NO.
Reset Timing
CLKOUT4
CLKOUT6
1
RESET
2
3
4
5
6
7
AECLKIN
AECLKOUT1
AECLKOUT2
EMIF Z Group†‡
8
9
10
11
PRODUCT PREVIEW
EMIF High Group†
EMIF Low Group†
12
13
14
15
Low Group†
Z Group†‡
17
Boot and Device
Configuration Inputs§
16
† EMIF Z group consists of:
AEA[22:3], AED[63:0], ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0], AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE,AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE,
and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, ASOE3, ASDCKE, and APDT.
EMIF high group consists of: AHOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is high)
EMIF low group consists of: ABUSREQ; AHOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is low)
Low group consists of:
XSP_CS, XSP_CLK/MDCLK, and XSP_DO/MDIO; all of which apply only when PCI EEPROM is enabled
(with PCI_EN = 1). Otherwise, the XSP_CLK/MDCLK and XSP_DO/MDIO pins are in the
Z group. For more details on the PCI configuration pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
Z group consists of:
HD[31:0]/AD[31:0] and the muxed EMAC output pins, XSP_CLK/MDCLK, XSP_DO/MDIO, CLKX0,
CLKX1, FSX0, FSX1, DX0, DX1, CLKR0, CLKR1, FSR0, FSR1, TOUT0, TOUT1,
GP0[8]/PCI66, GP0[7:0], GP0[10]/PCBE3, HR/W/PCBE2, HDS2/PCBE1, PCBE0, GP0[13]/PINTA,
GP0[11]/PREQ, HDS1/PSERR, HCS/PPERR, HCNTL1/PDEVSEL, HAS/PPAR, HCNTL0/PSTOP,
HHWIL/PTRDY (16-bit HPI mode only), HRDY/PIRDY, and HINT/PFRAME.
‡ If AEA[22:19], LEND, BOOTMODE[1:0], ECLKIN_SEL[1:0], PCIEEAI, and HD5/AD5 pins are actively driven, care must be taken to ensure
no timing contention between parameters 6, 7, 14, 15, 16, and 17.
§ Boot and Device Configurations Inputs (during reset) include: AEA[22:19],LEND, BOOTMODE[1:0], ECLKIN_SEL[1:0], PCIEEAI, and HD5/AD5
The PCI_EN pin must be driven valid at all times and the user must not switch values throughout device operation.
Figure 10–1. Reset Timing†
122
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
External Interrupt Timing
11
External Interrupt Timing
Table 11–1. Timing Requirements for External Interrupts† (see Figure 11–1)
–500
–600
NO.
MIN
1
2
tw(ILOW)
tw(IHIGH)
UNIT
MAX
Width of the interrupt pulse low
4P
ns
Width of the interrupt pulse high
4P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
1
2
EXT_INTx, NMI
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Figure 11–1. External/NMI Interrupt Timing
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
123
Inter-Integrated Circuits (I2C) Timing
12
Inter-Integrated Circuits (I2C) Timing
Table 12–1. Timing Requirements for I2C Timings† (see Figure 12–1)
–500
–600
STANDARD
MODE
NO.
MIN
1
tc(SCL)
2
Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated START
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)
condition)
3
Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a repeated
th(SCLL-SDAL)
START condition)
4
tw(SCLL)
tw(SCLH)
5
6
PRODUCT PREVIEW
7
8
9
10
12
Pulse duration, SCL low
Pulse duration, SCL high
14
15
4.7
0.6
µs
4
0.6
µs
4.7
1.3
µs
4
0.6
100‡
0§
µs
0.9¶
1.3
20 + 0.1Cb#
300
ns
20 + 0.1Cb#
20 + 0.1Cb#
300
ns
300
ns
20 + 0.1Cb#
0.6
300
0
50
ns
400
pF
4.7
tw(SP)
Cb#
MAX
µs
tw(SDAH)
tr(SDA)
Rise time, SDA
1000
Rise time, SCL
1000
Fall time, SDA
300
tf(SCL)
Fall time, SCL
tsu(SCLH-SDAH) Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP condition)
13
MIN
2.5
250
0§
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START conditions
MAX
UNIT
10
tsu(SDAV-SDLH) Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high
th(SDA-SDLL) Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low (For I2C bus devices)
tr(SCL)
tf(SDA)
11
Cycle time, SCL
FAST
MODE
300
4
Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed)
Capacitive load for each bus line
ns
µs
µs
ns
µs
400
† The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered down.
‡ A Fast-mode I2C-bus device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement tsu(SDA–SCLH) ≥ 250 ns must then be met.
This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period
of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line tr max + tsu(SDA–SCLH) = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard-mode
I2C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released.
§ A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the VIHmin of the SCL signal) to bridge the undefined
region of the falling edge of SCL.
¶ The maximum th(SDA–SCLL) has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period [tw(SCLL)] of the SCL signal.
# Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
11
9
SDA
6
8
14
4
13
5
10
SCL
1
12
3
2
7
3
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 12–1. I2C Receive Timings
124
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Inter-Integrated Circuits (I2C) Timing
Table 12–2. Switching Characteristics for I2C Timings† (see Figure 12–2)
–500
–600
STANDARD
MODE
PARAMETER
MIN
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
td(SCLH-SDAL) Delay time, SCL high to SDA low (for a repeated START condition)
Delay time, SDA low to SCL low (for a START and a repeated
td(SDAL-SCLL)
START condition)
tw(SCLL)
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL low
MAX
FAST
MODE
MIN
UNIT
MAX
10
2.5
µs
4.7
0.6
µs
4
0.6
µs
4.7
1.3
µs
4
0.6
µs
td(SDAV-SDLH) Delay time, SDA valid to SCL high
tv(SDLL-SDAV) Valid time, SDA valid after SCL low (For I2C bus devices)
250
100
ns
0
0
0.9
tw(SDAH)
tr(SDA)
4.7
1.3
20 + 0.1Cb†
300
ns
20 + 0.1Cb†
20 + 0.1Cb†
300
ns
300
ns
20 + 0.1Cb†
0.6
300
tr(SCL)
tf(SDA)
Pulse duration, SCL high
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START conditions
Rise time, SDA
1000
Rise time, SCL
1000
Fall time, SDA
300
tf(SCL)
Fall time, SCL
td(SCLH-SDAH) Delay time, SCL high to SDA high (for STOP condition)
300
4
29
Cp
Capacitance for each I2C pin
10
† Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
µs
ns
µs
10
26
µs
pF
24
SDA
21
23
19
28
20
25
SCL
16
27
18
17
22
18
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 12–2. I2C Transmit Timings
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
125
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NO.
Host-Port Interface (HPI) Timing
13
Host-Port Interface (HPI) Timing
Table 13–1. Timing Requirements for Host-Port Interface Cycles†‡ (see Figure 13–1 through Figure 13–8)
–500
–600
NO.
MIN
1
2
3
4
10
11
12
PRODUCT PREVIEW
13
tsu(SELV-HSTBL)
th(HSTBL-SELV)
Setup time, select signals§ valid before HSTROBE low
Hold time, select signals§ valid after HSTROBE low
tw(HSTBL)
tw(HSTBH)
Pulse duration, HSTROBE low
tsu(SELV-HASL)
th(HASL-SELV)
tsu(HDV-HSTBH)
th(HSTBH-HDV)
14
th(HRDYL-HSTBL)
18
tsu(HASL-HSTBL)
th(HSTBL-HASL)
19
Pulse duration, HSTROBE high between consecutive accesses
Setup time, select signals§ valid before HAS low
UNIT
MAX
5
ns
2.4
4P¶
ns
4P
ns
ns
5
ns
Hold time, select signals§ valid after HAS low
2
ns
Setup time, host data valid before HSTROBE high
5
ns
2.8
ns
2
ns
2
ns
2.1
ns
Hold time, host data valid after HSTROBE high
Hold time, HSTROBE low after HRDY low. HSTROBE should not be
inactivated until HRDY is active (low); otherwise, HPI writes will not complete
properly.
Setup time, HAS low before HSTROBE low
Hold time, HAS low after HSTROBE low
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
§ Select signals include: HCNTL[1:0] and HR/W. For HPI16 mode only, select signals also include HHWIL.
¶ Select the parameter value of 4P or 12.5 ns, whichever is larger.
Table 13–2. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Host-Port
Interface Cycles†‡ (see Figure 13–1 through Figure 13–8)
NO.
–500
–600
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1.3
4P + 8
6
td(HSTBL-HRDYH)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HRDY high#
7
td(HSTBL-HDLZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD low impedance for an HPI read
8
9
td(HDV-HRDYL)
toh(HSTBH-HDV)
15
td(HSTBH-HDHZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HD high impedance
12
ns
16
td(HSTBL-HDV)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD valid (HPI16 only)
4P + 8
ns
ns
2
ns
Delay time, HD valid to HRDY low
–3
ns
Output hold time, HD valid after HSTROBE high
1.5
ns
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
# This parameter is used during HPID reads and writes. For reads, at the beginning of a word transfer (HPI32) or the first half-word transfer (HPI16)
on the falling edge of HSTROBE, the HPI sends the request to the EDMA internal address generation hardware, and HRDY remains high until
the EDMA internal address generation hardware loads the requested data into HPID. For writes, HRDY goes high if the internal write buffer is
full.
126
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Host-Port Interface (HPI) Timing
HAS
1
1
2
2
HCNTL[1:0]
1
1
2
2
HR/W
1
1
2
2
HHWIL
4
3
HSTROBE†
3
HCS
15
9
7
15
9
16
HD[15:0] (output)
1st half-word
6
2nd half-word
8
HRDY
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Figure 13–1. HPI16 Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
HAS†
19
11
19
10
11
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
11
10
10
HR/W
11
11
10
10
HHWIL
4
3
HSTROBE‡
18
18
HCS
15
7
9
15
16
9
HD[15:0] (output)
6
1st half-word
8
2nd half-word
HRDY
† For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
‡ HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 13–2. HPI16 Read Timing (HAS Used)
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
127
Host-Port Interface (HPI) Timing
HAS
1
1
2
2
HCNTL[1:0]
1
1
2
2
HR/W
1
1
2
2
HHWIL
3
3
4
HSTROBE†
HCS
12
12
13
13
HD[15:0] (input)
1st half-word
2nd half-word
6
14
HRDY
PRODUCT PREVIEW
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 13–3. HPI16 Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
19
HAS†
19
11
11
10
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
11
10
10
HR/W
11
11
10
10
HHWIL
3
4
HSTROBE‡
18
18
HCS
12
13
12
13
HD[15:0] (input)
1st half-word
6
2nd half-word
14
HRDY
† For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
‡ HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 13–4. HPI16 Write Timing (HAS Used)
128
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Host-Port Interface (HPI) Timing
HAS
1
2
1
2
HCNTL[1:0]
HR/W
3
HSTROBE†
HCS
7
9
15
HD[31:0] (output)
6
8
HRDY
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Figure 13–5. HPI32 Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
19
HAS†
11
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
10
HR/W
18
3
HSTROBE‡
HCS
7
9
15
HD[31:0] (output)
6
8
HRDY
† For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
‡ HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 13–6. HPI32 Read Timing (HAS Used)
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
129
Host-Port Interface (HPI) Timing
HAS
1
2
1
2
HCNTL[1:0]
HR/W
3
HSTROBE†
HCS
12
13
HD[31:0] (input)
6
14
HRDY
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Figure 13–7. HPI32 Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
19
HAS†
11
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
10
HR/W
3
18
HSTROBE‡
HCS
12
13
HD[31:0] (input)
6
14
HRDY
† For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
‡ HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 13–8. HPI32 Write Timing (HAS Used)
130
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Timing
14
Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Timing
Table 14–1. Timing Requirements for PCLK†‡ (see Figure 14–1)
–500 [33 MHz]
NO
NO.
1
2
3
MIN
30 (or 4P§)
–600 [66 MHz]
MAX
MIN
MAX
15 (or 4P§)
UNIT
tc(PCLK)
tw(PCLKH)
Cycle time, PCLK
Pulse duration, PCLK high
11
6
ns
tw(PCLKL)
tsr(PCLK)
Pulse duration, PCLK low
11
6
ns
4
∆v/∆t slew rate, PCLK
1
4
† For 3.3-V operation, the reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VILP MAX and VIHP MIN.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
§ Select the parameter value, whichever is larger.
1
1.5
4
V/ns
0.4 DVDD V MIN
Peak to Peak for
3.3V signaling
4
2
ns
3
4
Figure 14–1. PCLK Timing
Table 14–2. Timing Requirements for PCI Reset (see Figure 14–2)
–500
–600
NO.
MIN
1
2
tw(PRST)
tsu(PCLKA-PRSTH)
Pulse duration, PRST
Setup time, PCLK active before PRST high
UNIT
MAX
1
ms
100
µs
PCLK
1
PRST
2
Figure 14–2. PCI Reset (PRST) Timing
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
131
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PCLK
Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Timing
Table 14–3. Timing Requirements for PCI Inputs (see Figure 14–3)
NO.
–500
–600
33 MHz
66 MHz
MIN
4
tsu(IV-PCLKH)
th(IV-PCLKH)
5
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
Setup time, input valid before PCLK high
7
3
ns
Hold time, input valid after PCLK high
0
0
ns
PCLK
4
5
PCI Input
Inputs Valid
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Figure 14–3. PCI Input Timing (33-/66-MHz)
Table 14–4. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for PCI Outputs
(see Figure 14–4)
NO.
1
PARAMETER
–500
–600
33 MHz
66 MHz
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
11
2
6
td(PCLKH-OV)
td(PCLKH-OLZ)
Delay time, PCLK high to output valid
2
2
Delay time, PCLK high to output low impedance
2
3
td(PCLKH-OHZ)
Delay time, PCLK high to output high impedance
2
28
ns
ns
14
ns
PCLK
1
1
PCI Output
2
3
Figure 14–4. PCI Output Timing (33-/66-MHz)
132
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Timing
Table 14–5. Timing Requirements for Serial EEPROM Interface (see Figure 14–5)
–500
–600
NO.
MIN
8
tsu(DIV-CLKH)
th(CLKH-DIV)
9
Setup time, XSP_DI valid before XSP_CLK high
UNIT
MAX
50
ns
0
ns
Hold time, XSP_DI valid after XSP_CLK high
Table 14–6. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Serial EEPROM
Interface† (see Figure 14–5)
PARAMETER
MIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
tw(CSL)
td(CLKL-CSL)
Pulse duration, XSP_CS low
td(CSH-CLKH)
tw(CLKH)
tw(CLKL)
tosu(DOV-CLKH)
UNIT
TYP
MAX
4092P
ns
0
ns
Delay time, XSP_CS high to XSP_CLK high
2046P
ns
Pulse duration, XSP_CLK high
2046P
ns
Pulse duration, XSP_CLK low
2046P
ns
Output setup time, XSP_DO valid after XSP_CLK high
2046P
ns
2046P
ns
Delay time, XSP_CLK low to XSP_CS low
7
toh(CLKH-DOV)
Output hold time, XSP_DO valid after XSP_CLK high
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
2
1
XSP_CS
3
4
5
XSP_CLK
6
7
XSP_DO
8
9
XSP_DI
Figure 14–5. PCI Serial EEPROM Interface Timing
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
133
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NO.
–500
–600
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing
15
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing
Table 15–1. Timing Requirements for McBSP†‡ (see Figure 15–1)
–500
–600
NO.
2
PRODUCT PREVIEW
3
tc(CKRX)
tw(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
5
tsu(FRH-CKRL)
Setup time,
time external FSR high before CLKR low
6
th(CKRL-FRH)
Hold time,
time external FSR high after CLKR low
7
tsu(DRV-CKRL)
Setup time,
time DR valid before CLKR low
8
th(CKRL-DRV)
time DR valid after CLKR low
Hold time,
10
tsu(FXH-CKXL)
Setup time,
time external FSX high before CLKX low
11
th(CKXL-FXH)
Hold time,
time external FSX high after CLKX low
CLKR/X ext
CLKR/X ext
MIN
4P§
ns
0.5tc(CKRX) – 1¶
CLKR int
9
CLKR ext
1.3
CLKR int
6
CLKR ext
3
CLKR int
8
CLKR ext
0.9
CLKR int
3
CLKR ext
3.1
CLKX int
9
CLKX ext
1.3
CLKX int
6
CLKX ext
3
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
† CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
§ The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications is 75 MHz for –600 devices and 66 MHz for –500 devices; therefore, the minimum
CLKR/X clock cycle is either four times the CPU cycle time (4P), or 13.3 ns (75 MHz) for –600 devices [or 15 ns (66 MHz) for –500 devices],
whichever value is larger. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz (P = 1.67 ns), use 13.3 ns as the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle (by setting
the appropriate CLKGDV ratio or external clock source). When running parts at 500 MHz (P = 2 ns), use 15 ns as the minimum CLKR/X clock
cycle. The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications applies to the following hardware configuration: the serial port is a Master
of the clock and frame syncs (with CLKR connected to CLKX, FSR connected to FSX, CLKXM = FSXM = 1, and CLKRM = FSRM = 0) in data
delay 1 or 2 mode (R/XDATDLY = 01b or 10b) and the other device the McBSP communicates to is a Slave.
¶ This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.
134
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing
Table 15–2. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP†‡
(see Figure 15–1)
–500
–600
PARAMETER
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal CLKR/X generated
from CLKS input
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1.4
10
4P§¶
C – 1#
C + 1#
ns
ns
1
td(CKSH-CKRXH)
2
Cycle time, CLKR/X
3
tc(CKRX)
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X int
4
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid
CLKR int
–2.1
3
CLKX int
–1.7
3
9
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time,
time CLKX high to internal FSX valid
CLKX ext
1.7
9
–3.9
4
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
impedance
Disable time, DX high im
edance following last data bit
from CLKX high
CLKX int
12
CLKX ext
CLKX int
–2.1
–3.9 + D1||
9
4 + D2||
13
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time,
time CLKX high to DX valid
CLKX ext
–2.1 + D1||
9 + D2||
14
td(FXH-DXV)
CLKR/X int
ns
ns
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
FSX int
–2.3
5.6
ONLY applies when in data
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode
FSX ext
1.9
9
ns
ns
ns
ns
† CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.
‡ Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
§ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
¶ The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications is 75 MHz for –600 devices and 66 MHz for –500 devices; therefore, the minimum
CLKR/X clock cycle is either four times the CPU cycle time (4P), or 13.3 ns (75 MHz) for –600 devices [or 15 ns (66 MHz) for –500 devices],
whichever value is larger. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz (P = 1.67 ns), use 13.3 ns as the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle (by setting
the appropriate CLKGDV ratio or external clock source). When running parts at 500 MHz (P = 2 ns), use 15 ns as the minimum CLKR/X clock
cycle. The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications applies to the following hardware configuration: the serial port is a Master
of the clock and frame syncs (with CLKR connected to CLKX, FSR connected to FSX, CLKXM = FSXM = 1, and CLKRM = FSRM = 0) in data
delay 1 or 2 mode (R/XDATDLY = 01b or 10b) and the other device the McBSP communicates to is a Slave.
# C = H or L
S = sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see ¶ footnote above).
|| Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 4P, D2 = 8P
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
135
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NO.
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing
CLKS
1
2
3
3
CLKR
4
4
FSR (int)
5
6
FSR (ext)
7
DR
8
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
2
3
3
CLKX
9
FSX (int)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
11
10
FSX (ext)
FSX (XDATDLY=00b)
14
13
Bit(n-1)
12
DX
Bit 0
13
(n-2)
(n-3)
Figure 15–1. McBSP Timing
Table 15–3. Timing Requirements for FSR When GSYNC = 1 (see Figure 15–2)
–500
–600
NO.
MIN
1
2
tsu(FRH-CKSH)
th(CKSH-FRH)
UNIT
MAX
Setup time, FSR high before CLKS high
4
ns
Hold time, FSR high after CLKS high
4
ns
CLKS
1
2
FSR external
CLKR/X (no need to resync)
CLKR/X (needs resync)
Figure 15–2. FSR Timing When GSYNC = 1
136
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing
Table 15–4. Timing Requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave:
CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 15–3)
–500
–600
NO
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXL)
th(CKXL-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low
UNIT
SLAVE
MAX
MIN
MAX
12
2 – 12P
ns
4
5 + 24P
ns
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
Table 15–5. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP as
SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 15–3)
–500
–600
PARAMETER
MASTER§
2
th(CKXL-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXH)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high#
3
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
6
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX low
7
tdis(FXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
FSX high
8
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
1
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
MIN
T–2
T+3
ns
L–2
L+3
ns
–2
4
L–2
L+3
12P + 2.8
MAX
20P + 17
ns
ns
4P + 3
12P + 17
ns
8P + 1.8
16P + 17
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master clock
(CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
FSX
7
6
DX
8
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 15–3. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
137
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NO
NO.
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing
Table 15–6. Timing Requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave:
CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 15–4)
–500
–600
NO
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
UNIT
SLAVE
MAX
MIN
MAX
12
2 – 12P
ns
4
5 + 24P
ns
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
Table 15–7. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP as
SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 15–4)
–500
–600
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NO
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§
MIN
UNIT
SLAVE
MAX
MIN
MAX
2
th(CKXL-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXH)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high#
3
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
–2
4 12P + 4
20P + 17
ns
6
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX low
–2
4 12P + 3
20P + 17
ns
7
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
16P + 17
ns
1
L–2
L+3
T–2
T+3
H–2
H+4
ns
ns
8P + 2
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master clock
(CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
6
Bit 0
7
FSX
DX
3
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 15–4. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0
138
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing
Table 15–8. Timing Requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave:
CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 15–5)
–500
–600
NO
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
UNIT
SLAVE
MAX
MIN
MAX
12
2 – 12P
ns
4
5 + 24P
ns
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
Table 15–9. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP as
SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 15–5)
–500
–600
PARAMETER
MASTER§
MIN
UNIT
SLAVE
MAX
MIN
MAX
2
th(CKXH-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXL)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low#
3
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
6
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high
7
tdis(FXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
FSX high
4P + 3
12P + 17
ns
8
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
8P + 2
16P + 17
ns
1
T–2
T+3
H–2
H+3
–2
H–2
ns
ns
4 12P + 4
20P + 17
H+3
ns
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master clock
(CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
FSX
7
6
8
DX
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 15–5. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
139
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NO
NO.
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing
Table 15–10. Timing Requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave:
CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 15–6)
–500
–600
NO
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
5
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
UNIT
SLAVE
MAX
MIN
MAX
12
2 – 12P
ns
4
5 + 24P
ns
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
Table 15–11. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP as
SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 15–6)
–500
–600
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NO
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
H–2
H+3
T–2
T+1
MIN
MAX
2
th(CKXH-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXL)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low#
3
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
–2
4 12P + 4
20P + 17
ns
6
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high
–2
4 12P + 3
20P + 17
ns
7
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
16P + 17
ns
1
L–2
L+4
ns
ns
8P + 2
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master clock
(CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
FSX
6
DX
7
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 15–6. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1
140
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) Timing
16
Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) Timing
Table 16–1. Timing Requirements for MRCLK (see Figure 16–1)
–500
–600
NO.
MIN
1
2
3
UNIT
MAX
tc(MRCLK)
tw(MRCLKH)
Cycle time, MRCLK
25
ns
Pulse duration, MRCLK high
11
ns
tw(MRCLKL)
tt(MRCLK)
Pulse duration, MRCLK low
11
ns
4
Transition time, MRCLK
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
3
ns
4
1
3
2
4
Figure 16–1. MRCLK Timing (EMAC – Receive)
Table 16–2. Timing Requirements for MTCLK (see Figure 16–1)
–500
–600
NO.
MIN
1
2
3
UNIT
MAX
tc(MTCLK)
tw(MTCLKH)
Cycle time, MTCLK
400
ns
Pulse duration, MTCLK high
180
ns
tw(MTCLKL)
tt(MTCLK)
Pulse duration, MTCLK low
180
ns
4
Transition time, MTCLK
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
5
4
1
2
ns
3
MTCLK
4
Figure 16–2. MTCLK Timing (EMAC – Transmit)
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
141
PRODUCT PREVIEW
MRCLK
Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) Timing
Table 16–3. Timing Requirements for EMAC MII Receive 10/100 Mbit/s† (see Figure 16–3)
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tsu(MRXD-MRCLKH) Setup time, receive selected signals valid before MRCLK high
8
ns
2
th(MRCLKH-MRXD)
8
ns
Hold time, receive selected signals valid after MRCLK high
† Receive selected signals include: MRXD3–MRXD0, MRXDV, and MRXER.
MRXD3–MRXD0 is driven by the PHY on the falling edge of MRCLK. MRXD3–MRXD0 timing
must be met during clock periods when MRXDV is asserted. MRXDV is asserted and
deasserted by the PHY on the falling edge of MRCLK. MRXER is driven by the PHY on the
falling edge of MRCLK (xx = 00–01).
1
2
MRCLK (Input)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
MRXD3–MRXD0,
MRXDV, MRXER (Inputs)
Figure 16–3. EMAC Receive Interface Timing
Table 16–4. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMAC
MII Transmit 10/100 Mbit/s‡ (see Figure 16–4)
NO.
1
PARAMETER
td(MTCLKH-MTXD)
Delay time, MTCLK high to transmit selected signals valid
MIN
MAX
5
25
UNIT
ns
‡ Transmit selected signals include: MTXD3–MTXD0, and MTXEN.
MTXD3–MTXD0 is driven by the reconciliation sublayer synchronous to the MTCLK. MTXEN is
asserted and deasserted by the reconciliation sublayer synchronous to the MTCLK rising edge.
1
MTCLK (Input)
MTXD3–MTXD0,
MTXEN (Outputs)
Figure 16–4. EMAC Transmit Interface Timing
142
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) Timing
17
Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) Timing
Table 17–1. Timing Requirements for MDIO Input (see Figure 17–1)
NO.
1
MIN
MAX
UNIT
Cycle time, MDCLK
400
2
tc(MDCLK)
tw(MDCLK)
ns
Pulse duration, MDCLK high/low
180
3
tt(MDCLK)
Transition time, MDCLK
4
tsu(MDIO-MDCLKH)
Setup time, MDIO data input valid before MDCLK high
10
ns
5
th(MDCLKH-MDIO)
Hold time, MDIO data input valid after MDCLK high
10
ns
ns
5
ns
1
MDCLK
4
MDIO
(input)
Figure 17–1. MDIO Input Timing
Table 17–2. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MDIO Output
(see Figure 17–2)
NO.
7
PARAMETER
td(MDCLKL-MDIO)
MIN
Delay time, MDCLK low to MDIO data output valid
MAX
UNIT
100
ns
1
MDCLK
7
MDIO
(output)
Figure 17–2. MDIO Output Timing
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
143
PRODUCT PREVIEW
5
Timer Timing
18
Timer Timing
Table 18–1. Timing Requirements for Timer Inputs† (see Figure 18–1)
–500
–600
NO.
MIN
1
2
tw(TINPH)
tw(TINPL)
UNIT
MAX
Pulse duration, TINP high
8P
ns
Pulse duration, TINP low
8P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
Table 18–2. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Timer Outputs†
(see Figure 18–1)
NO.
–500
–600
PARAMETER
MIN
3
PRODUCT PREVIEW
4
tw(TOUTH)
tw(TOUTL)
UNIT
MAX
Pulse duration, TOUT high
8P – 3
ns
Pulse duration, TOUT low
8P – 3
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
2
1
TINPx
4
3
TOUTx
Figure 18–1. Timer Timing
144
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Port Timing
19
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Port Timing
Table 19–1. Timing Requirements for GPIO Inputs†‡ (see Figure 19–1)
–500
–600
NO.
MIN
1
2
tw(GPIH)
tw(GPIL)
UNIT
MAX
Pulse duration, GPIx high
8P
ns
Pulse duration, GPIx low
8P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ The pulse width given is sufficient to generate a CPU interrupt or an EDMA event. However, if a user wants to have the DSP recognize the GPIx
changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GPIx duration must be extended to at least 12P to allow the DSP enough time to access
the GPIO register through the CFGBUS.
Table 19–2. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs†
(see Figure 19–1)
PARAMETER
MIN
3
4
tw(GPOH)
tw(GPOL)
UNIT
MAX
Pulse duration, GPOx high
32P
ns
Pulse duration, GPOx low
32P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
2
1
GPIx
4
3
GPOx
Figure 19–1. GPIO Port Timing
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
145
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NO.
–500
–600
JTAG Test-Port Timing
20
JTAG Test-Port Timing
Table 20–1. Timing Requirements for JTAG Test Port (see Figure 20–1)
–500
–600
NO.
MIN
1
UNIT
MAX
Cycle time, TCK
35
ns
3
tc(TCK)
tsu(TDIV-TCKH)
Setup time, TDI/TMS/TRST valid before TCK high
10
ns
4
th(TCKH-TDIV)
Hold time, TDI/TMS/TRST valid after TCK high
9
ns
Table 20–2. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for JTAG Test Port
(see Figure 20–1)
NO.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
2
–500
–600
PARAMETER
td(TCKL-TDOV)
Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid
UNIT
MIN
MAX
–3
18
ns
1
TCK
2
2
TDO
4
3
TDI/TMS/TRST
Figure 20–1. JTAG Test-Port Timing
146
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Mechanical Data
21
Mechanical Data
21.1 Ball Grid Array Mechanical Data Drawing (GDK)
GDK (S–PBGA–N548)
PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY
23,10
SQ
22,90
20,00 TYP
21,10
SQ
20,90
0,80
0,40
AF
AE
AD
AC
AB
AA
Y
W
V
U
0,80
T
R
PRODUCT PREVIEW
P
N
M
L
0,40
K
A1 Corner
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
Bottom View
2,80 MAX
0,50 NOM
Seating Plane
0,55
0,45
0,10
0,45
0,35
0,12
4203481-3/B 07/02
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.
C. Flip chip application only.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
147
Mechanical Data
Table 21–1. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (S-PBGA Package) [GDK]
°C/W
Air Flow (m/s†)
Junction-to-case
3.3
N/A
Junction-to-board
7.92
N/A
18.2
0.00
15.3
0.5
NO
1
2
RΘJC
RΘJB
3
4
5
RΘJA
Junction to free air
Junction-to-free
6
7
PRODUCT PREVIEW
8
PsiJT
PsiJB
Junction to package top
Junction-to-package
Junction to board
Junction-to-board
13.7
1.0
12.2
2.00
0.37
0.00
0.47
0.5
0.57
1.0
0.7
2.00
11.4
0.00
11
0.5
10.7
1.0
10.2
2.00
† m/s = meters per second
148
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003
Mechanical Data
21.2 Ball Grid Array Mechanical Data Drawing (GNZ)
GNZ (S–PBGA–N548)
PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY
27,20
SQ
26,80
25,00 TYP
1,00
25,20
SQ
24,80
0,50
AF
AE
AD
AC
AB
AA
Y
W
V
U
T
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
PRODUCT PREVIEW
A1 Corner
1,00
0,50
1
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
Bottom View
2,80 MAX
0,50 NOM
Seating Plane
0,70
0,50
0,10
0,60
0,40
0,15
4202595-5/E 12/02
NOTES: A.
B.
C.
D.
All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
This drawing is subject to change without notice.
Flip chip application only.
Substrate color may vary.
April 2003 – May 2003
SPRS219A
149
Mechanical Data
Table 21–2. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (S-PBGA Package) [GNZ]
°C/W
Air Flow (m/s†)
Junction-to-case
3.3
N/A
Junction-to-board
7.46
N/A
17.4
0.00
14.0
0.5
NO
1
2
RΘJC
RΘJB
3
4
5
RΘJA
Junction to free air
Junction-to-free
6
7
PRODUCT PREVIEW
8
PsiJT
PsiJB
Junction to package top
Junction-to-package
Junction to board
Junction-to-board
12.3
1.0
10.8
2.00
0.37
0.00
0.47
0.5
0.57
1.0
0.7
2.00
11.4
0.00
11
0.5
10.7
1.0
10.2
2.00
† m/s = meters per second
150
SPRS219A
April 2003 – May 2003